Your SlideShare is downloading. ×
Autodesk land desktop 2006 tutorials
Upcoming SlideShare
Loading in...5
×

Thanks for flagging this SlideShare!

Oops! An error has occurred.

×

Saving this for later?

Get the SlideShare app to save on your phone or tablet. Read anywhere, anytime - even offline.

Text the download link to your phone

Standard text messaging rates apply

Autodesk land desktop 2006 tutorials

4,970
views

Published on


0 Comments
2 Likes
Statistics
Notes
  • Be the first to comment

No Downloads
Views
Total Views
4,970
On Slideshare
0
From Embeds
0
Number of Embeds
0
Actions
Shares
0
Downloads
361
Comments
0
Likes
2
Embeds 0
No embeds

Report content
Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
No notes for slide

Transcript

  • 1. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials Table of Contents ‫ﻓﻬﺮس اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ 7 ............................................................ Lesson 1: Working with Projects ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻷول: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ‬ 7 ......................................................... Creating a New Drawing and Project ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺸﺮوع و رﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ 8 .....................................................................Setting Up the Point Database ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 9 .................................................................................. Setting Up the New Drawing ‫إﻋﺪاد رﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ 14 ............................................. Reviewing the Project Directory Structure ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ﻣﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع‬ 15 ............................................. Lesson 2: Changing Project Settings ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ: ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع‬ 15 ..... Copying a Project and Re-associating the Current Drawing ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺸﺮوع و إﻋﺎدة رﺑﻂ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ 17 ................................................... Changing Drawing Setup Parameters ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ 20 ................................................................................ Editing Drawing Settings ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ 22 ..................................................... Lesson 3: Working with Point Objects ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 22 ........................................................................................... Listing Point Objects ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 23 ........................................ Inserting Points from the Point Database ‫إدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 25 .............................................................................. Changing Point Elevations ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 27 ....................................................... Changing Point Display Properties ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 28 .......................................................... Changing Point Markers and Text ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و اﻟﻨﺺ‬ 31 ........................................ Controlling Point Display by Layer ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت‬ 32 .............................................................................. Lesson 4:Creating Points ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ: إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط‬ 32 ................................................................................... Creating Points Manually ‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ‬ 33 .............................. Specifying Automatic Elevations and Descriptions ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب و وﺻﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ 34 ............................................... Creating Points in the Points Database ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬ 36 ........................................................................... Placing Points on an Object ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ‬ 36 ................................................... Placing Points Along an Alignment ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 37 .......................................................................... Placing Points on a Surface ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ 39 ............................................................................ Lesson5: Editing Points ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ: ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 39 ................................................................................... Selecting Points to Edit ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ 41 .......................................................................................... Unlocking Points ‫إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 42 ..........................................................................Editing Point Datum ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 43 ............................ Editing Points with AutoCAD Commands AutoCAD ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ‬ 44 .............................................................................................Using Check Points ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 46 ....................................... Lesson 6: Working with Point Groups ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎدس: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 46 ..................................................................................... Creating a Point Group ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ Creating a Point Group Using the Raw Desc ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ 47 .......................................................................................................................... Matching Tab 49 .............................................. Applying Overrides to Point Groups ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻬﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 51 ............................................................................... Updating Point Groups ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 53 ................................................... Organizing Points by Descriptions ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ: ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ 53 .................................................................. Creating a Description Key File ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ‬ 55 ................................................................................ Creating Description Keys ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ‬ 57 ....................................................................................... Creating a Label Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬ 59 ......................................................Inserting Points with Description Keys ‫إدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ وﺻﻒ‬ 60 ...... Lesson 8: Importing Points from an ASCII Text File ‫ اﻟﻨﺼﻲ‬ASCII ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ: اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ 60 .......................................................................... Creating a Point File Format ‫إﻧﺸﺎء هﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ 63 ................................................... Importing an ASCII Text Point File ‫ ﻧﺼﻲ‬ASCII ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ Lesson 9: Labeling Lines, Curves, Spirals ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ: ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻷﺷﻜﺎل اﻟﺤﻠﺰوﻧﻴﺔ و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 66 .................................................................................................................................. and Points 66 ............................................................................... Changing Label Settings ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ 68 ........................................................................... Labeling Lines and Points ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 71 ................................................ Changing a Label Attached to an Object ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻜﺎﺋﻦ‬ 73 ... Lesson 10: Creating Label Styles for Lines and Points ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ: إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 73 ........................................................ Creating a New Line Label Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط‬ 76 ........................................................................................................... Labeling a Line ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻂ‬ -3-
  • 2. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 77 ..........................................................Creating a New Point Label Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط‬ 79 ........................................................................................................ Labeling a Point ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ 82 Lesson 11: Creating Tag Labels and Object Tables ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺤﺎدي ﻋﺸﺮ: إﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ و ﺟﺪاول ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت‬ 82 .................................................................... Creating a New Tag Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ 83 .................................................................... Labeling Objects with Tags ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ 84 ..................................................................................... Creating a Line Table ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط‬ 87 ...................................................................................... Creating a Point Table ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط‬ 91 ........................................... Updating (Re-drawing) an Object Table ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ )إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ( ﺟﺪول‬ 92 ............................................................................ Understanding Table Objects ‫ﻓﻬﻢ اﻟﺠﺪول آﻜﺎﺋﻦ‬ 96 ... Lesson 12: Working with the Terrain Model Explorer‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻷرض‬ 96 .................................................................... Creating a New Surface Folder ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ 97 ........................................................................................Adding Point Data ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 98 .......................................................................... Adding Contour Data ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر‬ 99 .................................................. Adding Breakline Data from Points ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ 102 ............. Adding Breakline Data from 3D Polylines ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‬ 103 ..................... Adding Breakline Data from 2D Polylines ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‬ 105 ............................................................. Adding Surface Boundary Data ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬ 106 .....................................................................................................Building a Surface ‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ‬ 108 ............................................................ Lesson 13: Editing Surfaces ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ‬ 108 ................................................................ Identifying Triangulation Problems ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ‬ 109 .......................................................................... Adding Points to the Surface ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ‬ 110 .............................................. Adding and Deleting TIN Lines ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أو ﺣﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت‬ 111 ................................................................................... Flipping TIN Faces ‫ﻗﻠﺐ أوﺟﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت‬ 113 ................................................................. Applying Surface Edit History ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬ 114 .......................................................... Lesson 14: Creating Contours ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ: إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 114 ................................................................................................. Creating Contours ‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 115 .................................................................. Creating a New Contour Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 118 ................................................................. Applying a New Contour Style ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 119 ........................................................................... Labeling Contours (‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )إدراج اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ‬ 121 .......................................................................... Converting Contour Objects ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ آﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 122 ................................................................................................... Editing Contours ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 124 ................................................... Lesson 15: Generating Sections ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت‬ 124 ...... Defining and Processing Sections From Single Surface ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ‬ 125 ........................................ Importing Sections From Single Surface ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ‬ 126 .. Creating and Processing Sections from Multiple Surfaces ‫إﻧﺸﺎء و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ 127 ..................................Importing Sections From Multiple Surfaces ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ 127 .................................................................... Viewing Dynamic Sections ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ‬ 130 ..................................................... Lesson 16: Visualizing Surfaces ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎدس ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﺼﻮر اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬ 130 ........................................................................ Creating Elevation Banding ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع‬ 132 ......................................... Viewing Surfaces in the Object Viewer ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت‬ 133 ................................. Using Object Viewer Navigation Tools ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أدوات اﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت‬ 134 ............................................................ Delineating Watershed Areas ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‬ 138 .........................................Lesson 17: Calculating Site Volumes ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺣﺴﺎب آﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ 138 .................................................................... Defining a Stratum and a Site ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ و اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ 141 ................................................................... Calculating Grid Volumes ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ 144 ..................................................... Calculating Composite Volumes ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت‬ 146 ............................................. Calculating Section Method Volumes ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت‬ 148 .........................................................................Viewing the Volume Report ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت‬ 149 ..................................................................... Calculating Parcel Volumes ‫ﺣﺴﺎب آﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ أرض‬ 151 ................................................... Generating Cut and Fill Contours ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم‬ 153 ..................................................... Generating Grid Ticks and Labels ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ 155 . Lesson 18: Drawing Tangents, Curves, and Spirals ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮ: رﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و اﻟﺤﻠﺰون‬ 155 ................................................................................................... Drawing Tangents ‫رﺳﻢ ﻣﻤﺎس‬ -4-
  • 3. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 156 .................................................................................................... Drawing Curves ‫رﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت‬ 157 ...................................................................................................... Drawing Spirals ‫رﺳﻢ ﺣﻠﺰون‬ 158 ........................................................................ Working with Speed Tables ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺠﺪاول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ 162 ................................................ Attaching Multiple Alignment Objects ‫رﺑﻂ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 164 ............... Lesson 19: Defining and Editing Alignments ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 164 ........................................ Defining an Alignment from a Polyline ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط‬ 165 .............................................. Defining an Alignment from Objects ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت‬ 167 ........................................... Viewing and Editing Alignment Data ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 169 ................................................................Generating Alignment Reports ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ Lesson 20: Creating Alignment Stationing and Offsets ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﻌﺸﺮون: إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺤﻄﺎت و إزاﺣﺔ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 171 ................................................................................................................................................. 171 .......................................................................... Changing Station Settings ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‬ 173 ........................................................... Generating Alignment Stationing ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 176 ..................................................................................................... Creating Offsets ‫إﻧﺸﺎء إزاﺣﺔ‬ -5-
  • 4. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪروس و اﻟﺘﻲ هﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﺪروس و ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ اﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ و ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ إﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ و هﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ:‬ ‫‪C:Program FilesLand Desktop 2006Landtut‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈذا آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ أﺟﺮﻳﺖ درس ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ و ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒـﻴـﻘﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻪ إﻟﻲ هﺬا اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ 6002 ‪Land Projects‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺪرس ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫-6-‬
  • 5. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻷول: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ ‪Lesson 1: Working with Projects‬‬ ‫أول ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻪ هﻮ أن اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ Drawings‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻤﺸﺮوع ‪ Project‬و اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن رﺳﻮﻣﺎت أو ﻧﻘﺎط أو أﺳﻄﺢ أو ﺧﻂ أﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ أو أرﺻﺎد ﻣﺴﺎﺣﻴﺔ.‬ ‫إن ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﻻ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ Drawing‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪات ‪ Folders‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺸﺮوع و رﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪Creating a New Drawing and Project‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء رﺳﻢ ‪ Drawing‬و ﻣﺸﺮوع ‪ Project‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﻴﻦ ﺑﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.New‬‬ ‫2- أدﺧﻞ 1_‪ Lesson‬أﻣﺎم اﻻﺳﻢ ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 1(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 1‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Project and Drawing Location‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر هﻮ 6002 ‪) Land Projects‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 1( ﺛﻢ‬ ‫3-‬ ‫أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Create Project‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Project Details‬ﻹدﺧﺎل ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 2(.‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Initial Settings for New Drawings‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر )‪ Default (Meters‬ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪) Prototype‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫4-‬ ‫2(.‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Project Information‬ادﺧﻞ 1_‪ Project‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Name‬آﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮوع )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 2(.‬ ‫5-‬ ‫ادﺧﻞ ‪ Project for Exploring Land Desktop Startup‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Description‬آﻮﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮوع و ادﺧﻞ‬ ‫6-‬ ‫‪ Training‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Keywords‬آﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮوع )أﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 2(.‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Drawing Path for this Project‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Project "DWG" Folder‬أﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 2(.‬ ‫7-‬ ‫-7-‬
  • 6. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 2‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.New Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫9- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Select Drawing Template‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪ Browse‬و اذهﺐ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻘﻮاﻟﺐ ‪ Template folder‬و‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎرﻩ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ هﻮ:‬ ‫‪C:Program FilesLand Desktop 2006Template‬‬ ‫و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﻟﺐ ‪ Template list‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) aec_m.dwt‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 1(.‬ ‫01- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Project and Drawing Location‬ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ‪ Project Name‬ﺗﻌﺮض 1_‪ Project‬و أن ‪Drawing‬‬ ‫‪ Path‬هﻮ ‪) Land Projects 2006 Project_1dwg‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 1(.‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪ OK‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Setting Up the Point Database‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻀﻮاﺑﻂ ‪ Parameters‬ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫1- ﺑﻌﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺸﺮوع ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻮف ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Create Point Database‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺟﺪﻳﺪة، ﺗﺄآﺪ أن‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Point Description Field Size‬هﻲ 23 ﺣﺮف )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 3(.‬ ‫2- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Use Point Names‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Point Name Field Size‬هﻲ 61 ﺣﺮف )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 3(.‬ ‫3- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 3‬ ‫-8-‬
  • 7. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫إﻋﺪاد رﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪Setting Up the New Drawing‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻀﻮاﺑﻂ ‪ Parameters‬ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫1- ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺳﻮف ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮاري ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻹﻋﺪادات ‪ Load Settings‬ﻓﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر‬ ‫‪ Path‬هﻮ ‪) Program FilesLand Desktop 2006DataSetup‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 4(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 4‬ ‫2- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Load a Drawing Setup Profile‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Profile Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ )005:1 ,‪m500.set (Metric‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 4( ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪ View‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) View Drawing Setup Profile‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 5(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 5‬ ‫-9-‬
  • 8. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ 5( أن ‪ Coordinate Zone‬و ‪ Text Style‬و ‪ Drawing Border‬ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻮا ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺮﺳﻢ آﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ.‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪ Load Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Load‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪.m500 Profile‬‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟﻮﺣﺪات ‪ Units‬و ﺗﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺣﺪات )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 6(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 6‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس ‪ Scale‬و اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 7(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 7‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻷﻓﻘﻲ ‪ Horizontal Scale‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ إدراج اﻟﻜﺘﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ‪ (Block Insertion) Drawing Block‬و ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫‪ Text Size‬اﻟﺬي ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، أﻣﺎ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ ‪ Vertical Scale‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪار اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪Default Vertical‬‬ ‫‪ Exaggeration‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ و اﻟﻄﻮﻟﻴﺔ ‪ Profiles and Cross Sections‬اﻟﻤﻨﺸﺄة ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Civil Design‬‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟﻨﻄﺎق ‪) Zone‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 8(.‬ ‫- 01 -‬
  • 9. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 8 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Available Coordinate Systems ‫ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬UTM, NAD 83 Datum ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Categories ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .(8 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬UTM with NAD 83 Datum, Zone 11, Meter; Central Meridian 117d W .(9 ‫ و اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺪاداﺗﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Orientation ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬Next ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ‬ 9 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Style Set Name ‫، ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬Text Style ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ‬Next ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .(10 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬mleroy ‫ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ‬Load ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬mleroy.stp - 11 -
  • 10. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 01‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Current Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ 001‪) L‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 01(.‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻹﻃﺎر ‪) Border‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 11(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 11‬ ‫21- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Border Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Scaled Block‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Browse‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Select a‬‬ ‫‪) Custom Block‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 11(.‬ ‫31- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪) pm_841x594.dwg‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 21( ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Open‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻹﻃﺎر‬ ‫‪.Border‬‬ ‫- 21 -‬
  • 11. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 21‬ ‫41- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار ﺣﻔﻆ اﻹﻋﺪادات ‪.Save Settings‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 31‬ ‫إذا آﻨﺖ ﺗﻮد ﺣﻔﻆ اﻹﻋﺪادات ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ ﻓﻲ رﺳﻮﻣﺎت ‪ Drawings‬أﺧﺮى، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﺳﻢ أﻣﺎم ‪ Profile Name‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Save‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 31(.‬ ‫51- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Finish‬ﻟﺘﻨﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪.Drawing Setup‬‬ ‫61- ﺳﻮف ﺗﻈﻬﺮ أﻣﺎﻣﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ.‬ ‫- 31 -‬
  • 12. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 41‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ﻣﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ‪Reviewing the Project Directory Structure‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ‪ Directory Structure‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ® ‪.Windows Explorer‬‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ® ‪ Windows Explorer‬و اذهﺐ إﻟﻲ 6002 ‪.Land Projects‬‬ ‫2- أﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ 6002 ‪ Land Projects‬و اﺳﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺪاﺧﻠﻪ.‬ ‫3- أﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع 1_‪ Project‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات ﺑﺪاﺧﻠﻪ و اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻔﻆ آﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻷﺧﺮ.‬ ‫آﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺗﺤﻔﻆ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟـ ‪ COGO‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت )‪ Microsoft® database (.mdb‬و اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻮي ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Point‬‬ ‫‪ Groups‬و ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪.Description Keys‬‬ ‫أﻣﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DWG‬ﻓﻴﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎت ‪ Drawing‬و اﻟﺘﻲ هﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و أﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ .dfm‬و اﻟﺘﻲ هﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ‪ ASCII text‬و ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ‪.Default Drawing Settings‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟـ ‪ SURVEY‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟـ ‪ Raw‬اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ Data Collectors‬و ‪ Field Book‬و‬ ‫‪ Observation Database‬و ‪ ، Traverse Adjustment Files‬و ﻳﺒﻘﻰ هﺬا اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﺎرﻏﺎ إﻟﻰ أن ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪.Autodesk Survey‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات ‪ Folders‬ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ Autodesk Land Desktop‬ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ‪ Surfaces‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DTM‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ ALIGN‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪ Alignments‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ Lots‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪ Parcels‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ ER‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪.Volumes‬‬ ‫و اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات ‪ Folders‬ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ Autodesk Civil Design‬ﻓﻴﻨﺸﺄ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ PIPEWKS‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﻟـ ‪ Pipes‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ HD‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪ Hydrology‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ CD‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪.Sheet Manager‬‬ ‫- 41 -‬
  • 13. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ: ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ‪Lesson 2: Changing Project Settings‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺸﺮوع ﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻊ رﺳﻮﻣﺎت أﺧﺮى ﺛﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد ﺣﻮاﺷﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة و آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت و اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﺎت اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺸﺮوع و إﻋﺎدة رﺑﻂ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪Copying a Project and Re-associating the Current Drawing‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻨﺴﺦ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع إﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﺮوع ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ أن ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و ﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و ﻟﺬا ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ أﺧﺮي ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع.‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ أي ﻣﺸﺮوع ﻧﺸﻂ أو اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ و ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺸﺮوع ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Land Desktop‬و ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺸﺮوع ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ رﺳﻢ أو ﻣﺸﺮوع ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ …‪ Project Mgr‬و اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪.Copy Option‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Project Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Project Management‬‬ ‫2- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Project‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Name‬أﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ Tutorial‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Copy‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Copy‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 51(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 51‬ ‫3- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Copy Project To‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ TutorialC‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 61(.‬ ‫- 51 -‬
  • 14. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 61‬ ‫4- ادﺧﻞ ‪ Building site - Northwest corner‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Description‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 61(.‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮخ ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات و اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت آﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻷﺻﻠﻲ.‬ ‫5- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ رواﺑﻂ اﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎت إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 71(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 71‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Close‬ﻟﺘﻐﻠﻖ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟـ ‪.Project Management‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪.Lesson-2.dwg‬‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،File‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ،TutorialC‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Lesson-2.dwg‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 81(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 81‬ ‫- 61 -‬
  • 15. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪Changing Drawing Setup Parameters‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻘـﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻷﻓﻘﻲ و ﺳﺘﺮى آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﻨﺺ، ﻓﻲ هــﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻘـﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻷﻓــــﻘﻲ هـــﻮ‬ ‫005:1، و وﺣﺪة ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﻖ ‪ 2MM‬ﺗﺴﺎوي 1 ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ، و ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ 005:1 هﻮ 2 و وﺣﺪات اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ، و ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ هﺬا أن ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ ‪ 2MM‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺑﺎرﺗﻔﺎع 2 ﻣﻢ.‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Command Line‬اآﺘﺐ ‪ ST‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Text Style‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2MM‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Font‬أدﺧﻞ 1 أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪ Height‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Apply‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪Close‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 91(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 91‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ إﻟﻰ 0001:1.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺧﺘﺮ‪ Drawing Setup‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Drawing Setup‬‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Scale‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Drawing Scale‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Horizontal‬اﺧﺘﺮ 0001:1 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 02(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 02‬ ‫- 71 -‬
  • 16. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Command Line‬اآﺘﺐ ‪ ST‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Text Style‬ﻣﺮة‬ ‫أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫6- ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟـ ‪ Height‬ﻟﻠﻨﺴﻖ ‪ 2MM‬هﻮ 2 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Cancel‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 12(.‬ ‫إن ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻴﺎس 0001:1 هﻮ 1 و وﺣﺪات اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ هﻲ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ، ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ هﺬا ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﺴﻖ ‪ 2MM‬ﺑﺎرﺗﻔﺎع‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﺺ ﻣﻘﺪارﻩ 2، ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻊ آﻞ أﻧﺴﺎق اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Land‬‬ ‫‪.Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 12‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ دﻗﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ إﻟﻲ 1.‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Drawing Setup‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Drawing Setup‬‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Units‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Display Precision‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Elevation‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1، ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪Samples‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج اﻟﻤﻌﺮوض )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 22(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 22‬ ‫إن هﺬا اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ إﺟﺮاؤﻩ و ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ.‬ ‫- 81 -‬
  • 17. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻷﺻﻞ و زاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺪوران ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Drawing Setup‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Orientation‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Base Point‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>>‪ Pick‬و اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪ Node Osnap‬ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 01.‬ ‫01- ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 01 ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Drawing Setup‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى، ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪Northing and‬‬ ‫‪ Easting‬ادﺧﻞ 0005 ﻟﻠـ ‪ Northing‬و 0005 ﻟﻠـ ‪.Easting‬‬ ‫11- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ North Rotation‬ادﺧﻞ 0542.31 أﻣﺎم ‪ Angle‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 32(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 32‬ ‫21- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ، اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫31- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Utilities‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Symbol Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Symbol Manager‬‬ ‫41- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ COGO Metric Symbols‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Symbol Set‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Palette‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Details‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) North Arrow‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 42( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 42‬ ‫51- ﺣﺪد ﻣﻜﺎن ﻟﻌﺮض اﺗﺠﺎﻩ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ‪ Magnetic‬آﻮﺻﻒ ‪.Description‬‬ ‫- 91 -‬
  • 18. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 52‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪Editing Drawing Settings‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﻐﻴﺮ اﻹﻋﺪادات ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ، و ﺗﺤﻔﻆ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮات إﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻮذج ‪ Prototype‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‬ ‫ﻓﻲ رﺳﻮﻣﺎت أﺧﺮى ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Drawing Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Settings‬‬ ‫2- ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Program‬ﺗﻌﺮض ‪) Autodesk Land Desktop‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 62(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 62‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Settings‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Geodetic Labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Edit Settings‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 62( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫3-‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Geodetic Annotation Settings‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 72(.‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Line Annotation‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Az‬أزل ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Grid‬و ‪) Ground‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 72(.‬ ‫4-‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Suffix‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ m‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Grid‬و ‪ Ground‬و ‪) Geodetic‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 72(.‬ ‫5-‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Distance Unit‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ METERS‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Grid‬و ‪ Ground‬و ‪) Geodetic‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 72(.‬ ‫6-‬ ‫- 02 -‬
  • 19. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 72‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Settings‬‬ ‫هﺬﻩ اﻹﻋﺪادات ‪ Settings‬ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ، ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﻮذج ‪ Prototype‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫رﺳﻮﻣﺎت أﺧﺮى ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ.‬ ‫8- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Selected Item‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Save to Prototype‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 62( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Select‬‬ ‫‪) Prototype‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 82(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 82‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Prototype‬أﺧﺘﺮ )‪) DEFAULT (METERS‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 82( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Edit Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Close‬‬ ‫- 12 -‬
  • 20. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Lesson 3: Working with Point Objects‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Land Desktop‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ أو ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ، و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻬﻢ ﻣﻊ أواﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ:‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻇﻬﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺒﻬﺎ اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ أو ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻇﻬﺎرهﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ﻣﺤﺪد و ﺛﺎﺑﺖ.‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﺎرﺟﻴﺔ ‪ External Database‬و ﻟﻴﺲ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪدهﺎ ‪ Markers‬و ﻧﺺ ‪ Text‬و آﻼهﻤﺎ ﻟﻪ ﻧﺴﻘـﻪ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻪ و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ، و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀﺎ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟـ ‪.Label Style‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎس ﻇﻬﻮر ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Markers‬و اﻟﻨﺺ ‪ Text‬داﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺔ ‪ Relative‬أو ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ أو ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪.Absolute‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﺺ ‪ Text‬و اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Marker‬اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ‪ ،Grip Editing‬و‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺳﻬﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ آﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 92 و ﻻﺣﻆ اﻟﻔﺮق ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ 1 و ﻧﻘﻄﺔ 2(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 92‬ ‫وﺻﻒ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Descriptions‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺧﺎم ‪ Raw‬أو ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن آﺎﻣﻼ ‪ ) Full‬آﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ اﻟـ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ Description Key‬ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ(.‬ ‫إن اﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Layer‬آﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت ‪ Marker‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪادات ‪Settings‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺮدة.‬ ‫إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺎدﻳﻖ اﻟﺤﻮار داﺧﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪهﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ هﻴﺌﺔ ‪ Northing/Easting‬أو‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ Easting/Northing‬أو ‪ X,Y‬أو ‪.Y,X‬‬ ‫أﻣﺮ ‪ UNDO‬و هﻮ إﺣﺪى أواﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺗﻨﺤﺎز أو ﺗﺼﻄﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎم ‪.World UCS‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-3.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Listing Point Objects‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ هﻤﺎ 742 و 857، اﺳﺘﺨﺪم أﻣﺮ ‪ List‬و هﻮ إﺣﺪى أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742.‬ ‫- 22 -‬
  • 21. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫1- ادﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 03(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 03‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ آﺎﺋﻦ ‪ AECC_POINT‬و ﻟﻴﺴﺖ آﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟـ ‪ ،AutoCAD‬و إن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ، آﻤﺎ أن إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و وﺻﻔﻬﺎ و رﻗﻤﻬﺎ و اﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﻴﻦ داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫2- أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة.‬ ‫إدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Inserting Points from the Point Database‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ أو إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت، ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻤﺴﺢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 742 و 857 و إﻋﺎدة إدراﺟﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫1- اآﺘﺐ ‪ Erase‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Command Line‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 742 و 857 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Utilities‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Quick View‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 13‬ ‫3- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ‪ X‬ﻓﻲ أﻣﺎآﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ إزاﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 13(.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض آﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ List Points‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.List Points‬‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.List All Points‬‬ ‫6- اﺳﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 742 و 857.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 ﻣﻌﺮوﺿﺔ آـ ‪ 247L‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ أﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ أو ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ‪ Locked‬و ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮهﺎ ‪) Unlocked‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 23(.‬ ‫- 32 -‬
  • 22. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 23‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 33(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 33‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹدراج اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Insert Points to Drawing‬ﺛﻢ اآﺘﺐ ‪ W‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Window‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )ﺗﻘﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﺼﻒ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ(.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 43(.‬ ‫- 42 -‬
  • 23. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 43‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Changing Point Elevations‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺪرﺟﺔ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Insert‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Insertion Elevation‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Fixed elevation‬و ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪Fixed‬‬ ‫‪ Elevation‬هﻲ 0 )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 53(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 53‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Text‬و اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Automatic Leaders‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 63(.‬ ‫- 52 -‬
  • 24. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 63‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب.‬ ‫4- ادﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 857 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺗﺮى ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 73 ﻓﻤﺎزال اﻟـ ‪ Marker Location‬ﻳﻌﺮض .‪ ،245.51 m‬ﻓﺈﻋﺪادات اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ إﻋﺎدة إدراج هﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط أو إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 73‬ ‫5- أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹدراج اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Insert Points to Drawing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Window‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 742 و 857 ﻹﻋﺎدة إدراﺟﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫7- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ Point in Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪) Replace All‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 83(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 83‬ ‫- 62 -‬
  • 25. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫8- ادﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 857 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺗﺮى ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 93 ﻓﺎﻟـ ‪ Marker Location‬اﻵن ﻳﻌﺮض .‪.0 m‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 93‬ ‫9- أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة.‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Changing Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﻮف ﻧﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫1- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 857، ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﻳﻤﻨﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺄرة )‪ (Right click with the mouse‬و اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Display‬‬ ‫‪ Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Reset‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Point Elevation‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Reset Point Elevation in Drawing‬و أﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Actual Elevation‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 04(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 04‬ ‫3- ادﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ آﻼ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 14(.‬ ‫- 72 -‬
  • 26. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 14‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 14 ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 857 أﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ‪ The Marker‬هﻮ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ و هﻮ .‪ 245.51 m‬و أن‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 ﻣﺎزال ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ .‪ ،0 m‬إن اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻮري و ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰم إﻋﺎدة إدراج‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫4- أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة.‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و اﻟﻨﺺ ‪Changing Point Markers and Text‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت أو اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟـ ‪ ،AutoCAD‬ﻟﻮ ﻗﺮرت اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬آﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت ‪ Marker Style‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪.Ddptype‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺨﺘﺎر ﻋﻼﻣﺔ أﺧﺮى و ﺗﺮآﺐ رﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 857 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Display Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Marker‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Custom Marker Symbol‬اﺧﺘﺮ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺮاﺑﻌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ ‫‪ Superimposed‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة ‪) Circle Symbol‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 24(.‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Custom Marker Size‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Size in Absolute Units‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 2 أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪) Size‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 24(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 24‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻇﻬﻮر و ﻟﻮن رﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب و أﻳﻀﺎ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ.‬ ‫- 82 -‬
  • 27. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮن وﺻﻒ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﻨﺺ إﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ.‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Text‬ﺛﻢ و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Color and Visibility‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم اﻟﺼﻒ ‪ Elevation‬و اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬ ‫?‪) Visible‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 34(.‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻮن ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Description‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select a Color‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻮن، ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻮن ‪) Cyan‬أزرق ﻓﺎﺗﺢ( ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻷﻟﻮان اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ Standard Colors Palette‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀﺎ إدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ اﻟﻠﻮن ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﻓﺈذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 4 ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق اﻟﻤﺠﺎور ﻟﺼﻨﺪوق اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻮن ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻠﻮن إﻟﻲ اﻟﻠﻮن‬ ‫‪) Cyan‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 34(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 34‬ ‫7- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Style and Size‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Absolute Units‬و ادﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 2 أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪) Text Size‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 34( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ 857 ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﻈﻬﺮان ﺑﺤﺠﻢ أﺻﻐﺮ و أن رﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺔ، ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ آﻤﺎ هﻲ ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ و اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺎن ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫44(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 44‬ ‫- 92 -‬
  • 28. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫آﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮت أو آﺒﺮت اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Zoom in or out‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ و ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮان ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻳﺠﺐ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Regen‬إن‬ ‫آﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ و اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺒﻜﺮة اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺄرة ‪.(Mouse Scroll‬‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Preferences‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Point Display‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪Always Regenerate‬‬ ‫‪ Point Display After Zoom‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 54(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 54‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫11- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ اآﺘﺐ ‪ Regen‬ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫اﻵن ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ و اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮان ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Regen‬و ﻟﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 857 ﺗﺒﻘﻲ آﻤﺎ هﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺳﻬﺎ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ‪.Absolute Size‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮ آﺎﻧﺖ آﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط أو ﻋﺪد آﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ Absolute Size‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ و ﻧﺼﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻔﻀﻞ ﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Always Regenerate Point Display After Zoom‬آﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أداء أﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪Point Marker‬‬ ‫21- أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 742 ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺑﺾ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ‪.Grips‬‬ ‫31- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﻧﺤﻮ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر ﺳﻬﻢ آﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﺺ و اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 64(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 64‬ ‫- 03 -‬
  • 29. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪Controlling Point Display by Layer‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ The Point Layer‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪ Turn Off‬هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ.‬ ‫1- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 742 ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ أﻣﺎﻣﻚ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Edit Object Display‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Object Display‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 74(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 74‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 74( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Select Layer‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Layer‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) PNT_MISC‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 84( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Object‬‬ ‫‪ Display‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 84‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻷدوات ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪) PNT_MISC‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 94( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻐﻠﻖ اﻟـ ‪.Layer Properties Manager‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 94‬ ‫- 13 -‬
  • 30. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ: إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ‪Lesson 4:Creating Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﺘﻌﻠﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻲ و اﻟﺸﺮﻗﻲ ‪ Northing and Easting‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ ‫‪ Alignment‬أو ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻢ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ ،Surface Features‬و أﻳﻀﺎ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ و ﻏﻠﻖ ‪ Lock‬اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و اآﺘﺸﺎف‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺎرض ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-4.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ ‪Creating Points Manually‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ رﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Create‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Numbering‬أدﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 01 أﻣﺎم ‪) Current number‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 05(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 05‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Elevations‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Manual‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ و ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ .‪.249 m‬‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫6- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ.‬ ‫7- أدﺧﻞ 942 ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫9- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Descriptions‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Manual‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 15(.‬ ‫- 23 -‬
  • 31. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 15‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي و ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب .‪ 249 m‬و ﺑﻮﺻﻒ هﻮ ‪.BLDG‬‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫11- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ.‬ ‫21- ادﺧﻞ ‪ BLDG‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ و ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ .‪ 249 m‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 25(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 25‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب و وﺻﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪Specifying Automatic Elevations and Descriptions‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺴﺘﻜﻤﻞ إدراج اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﻨﺴﻮب و وﺻﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Create‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Elevation‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Automatic‬‬ ‫3- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Descriptions‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Automatic‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 35(.‬ ‫- 33 -‬
  • 32. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 35‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻟﻠﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب 942 و ﺑﻮﺻﻒ ‪.BLDG‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫5- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إدراج اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد ﺑﻤﻨﺴﻮب .‪ 249 m‬و ﺑﻮﺻﻒ ‪ BLDG‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 45(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 45‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ‪Creating Points in the Points Database‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﺎط داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت دون إدراﺟﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ، ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﺊ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Create‬و ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Numbering‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Insert to Drawing as Created‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 55(.‬ ‫- 43 -‬
  • 33. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 55‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ رآﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫4- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ، اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻹﻋﺪادات ﻟﻴﺘﻢ إدراج اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ، و إدراج ﺁﺧﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 65‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Create‬و ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Numbering‬اﺧﺘﺮ‪ Insert to Drawing as Created‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 55(.‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Insert Points to Drawing‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ N‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Number‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 31 ﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ اﻵن أن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 75(.‬ ‫- 53 -‬
  • 34. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 75‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ ‪Placing Points on an Object‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮآﻨﻴﻦ اﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺎن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Automatic‬‬ ‫2- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻌﻤﻮدي اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 85(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 85‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ و اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ.‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Placing Points Along an Alignment‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت ‪ Stations‬ﻣﺤﺪدة و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎت ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،Offset‬أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺛﻢ أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟـ ‪ Alignment‬اﻟﻨﺸﻂ أو اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫- 63 -‬
  • 35. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignment‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Alignment‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪.Alignment Librarian‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟـ ‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ 96‪ P3_HWY‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 95(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 95‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points – Alignments‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Measure Alignment‬‬ ‫5- أدﺧﻞ 00551 ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪء ‪ Beginning Station‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ 00061 ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪.Ending Station‬‬ ‫6- أدﺧﻞ 51 ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ‪ ،Offset‬و ادﺧﻞ 05 ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ‪ Station Interval‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 52 ﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺮي 11 ﻧﻘﻄﺔ أﻧﺸﺌﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 06(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 06‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ‪Placing Points on a Surface‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻷرض اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﻤﻮذج ﺷﺒﻜﻲ ﻟﻤﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ EG‬و ﺟﻌﻠﻪ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫- 73 -‬
  • 36. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Select Surface‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select surface to open‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ EG‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 06(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 16‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points – Surface‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.On Grid‬‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ )و هﻲ 0( ﻟﺪوران اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.‬ ‫6- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Intersection Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.‬ ‫7- أدﺧﻞ 05 آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ (Grid X Spacing) X‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ )05(‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.(Grid Y spacing) Y‬‬ ‫8- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Intersection Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ No‬ﻟـ ‪ Change the size or rotation of the grid/grid squares‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ أو زاوﻳﺔ دوراﻧﻬﺎ.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﺑﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 26(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 26‬ ‫- 83 -‬
  • 37. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ: ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Lesson5: Editing Points‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Point Editing‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ أرﻗﺎم اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ و اﻟﻮﺻﻒ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-5.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ‪Selecting Points to Edit‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Edit‬‬ ‫‪.Points‬‬ ‫3- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Enable Filtering‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 36(.‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Include‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 36(.‬ ‫5- ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ With Number Matching‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Selection Set in Drawing‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 36(.‬ ‫6- أدﺧﻞ ‪ W‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟـ ‪ Window‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺜﻼث ﻧﻘﺎط 742 و 842 و 857 ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 36‬ ‫- 93 -‬
  • 38. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫7- ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Edit Points‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى، ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺜﻼث ﻳﻈﻬﺮوا اﻵن داﺧﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪With Number‬‬ ‫‪) Matching‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 46(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 46‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Build List‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 46( ﻟﺘﺒﻨﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Edit‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 56(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 56‬ ‫- 04 -‬
  • 39. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 742 ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ‪ Locked‬و ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ، و ﻟﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن اﻷﺧﺮﻳﺎن ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﻤﺎ، و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺘﺨﺮج ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Edit Points‬ﻹزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Unlock‬ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742.‬ ‫01- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Unlocking Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺰﻳﻞ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Unlock‬ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 ﺛﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ و ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.X‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Lock/Unlock Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Unlock Points‬‬ ‫2- أدﺧﻞ ‪ S‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Selection‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 742 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 742 اﻵن ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Edit‬‬ ‫‪. Points‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة ﺳﺘﻌﺮض ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ و ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ X‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742.‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Edit‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 742 و ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Raw Desc‬ادﺧﻞ ‪) MON‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 66(.‬ ‫5- ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Easting‬ﻟﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ أدﺧﻞ 8446.101472 )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 66(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 66‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 742 اﻵن ﻟﻬﺎ وﺻﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ و ﺗﺤﺮآﺖ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ 02 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 76(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 76‬ ‫- 14 -‬
  • 40. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Editing Point Datum‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ 001 و 002 ﻣﺘﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة 001 ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Datum‬‬ ‫3- ادﺧﻞ 001 ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب.‬ ‫4- ادﺧﻞ ‪ D‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Dialog‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Points‬‬ ‫5- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Enable Filtering‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 86(.‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Reset‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ﻟﺘﻤﺤﻮ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ و ﺗﺨﺘﺎر ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 86(.‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Point Groups‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 86(.‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Groups‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ 2‪ DAY‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Build List‬ﻓﻲ أﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 86(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 86‬ ‫اﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج ﻓﻘﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ 001 و 002 ﻣﺘﺮ، ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Exclude‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ آﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻄﺎق.‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Exclude‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ With Elevation Matching‬و ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ اآﺘﺐ 002>,001<.‬ ‫هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻌﺎدﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ 001 ﻣﺘﺮ و ﻓﻮق 002 ﻣﺘﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 96(.‬ ‫- 24 -‬
  • 41. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 96‬ ‫01- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Build List‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ.‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫آﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ 001 إﻟﻰ 002 ﺗﻢ رﻓﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ 001 ﻣﺘﺮ.‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪Editing Points with AutoCAD Commands AutoCAD‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط، ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪا اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ MOVE‬و ‪ ROTATE‬و ‪ ،ALIGN‬أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪AutoCAD‬‬ ‫هﺬﻩ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ إن ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻠﻬﺎ داﺧﻞ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬و ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ ،Move‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ أوﻻ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ‬ ‫‪ AutoCAD‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Update‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ AutoCAD MOVE command‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Allow Points to be MOVE'd in‬‬ ‫‪ Drawing‬و أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Update Point Database After MOVE Command‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫07(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 07‬ ‫- 34 -‬
  • 42. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ، إن اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬اﻷﺧﺮى ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ أو ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Locked‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺨﻂ و ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪.window selection set‬‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ اآﺘﺐ ‪ ،Move‬و اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر اﻟﺨﻂ ذو ﻟﻮن اﻟﺼﺪأ ‪ Rust‬و ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺨﻂ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.Enter‬‬ ‫5- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Node Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 101 ﻟﺘﻜﻮن ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻷﺳﺎس ‪ Base Point‬ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Node Osnap‬ﻣﺮة‬ ‫أﺧﺮى اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 201 ﻟﺘﻜﻮن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد اﻟﺘﺤﺮك إﻟﻴﻬﺎ.‬ ‫6- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﺨﻂ و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ آﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﺈﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 17(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 17‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Using Check Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﺣﺪ أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬و هﻮ أﻣﺮ ‪ Undo‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎع اﻟﺨﻂ و ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻪ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﻤﺎ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ و ﻟﻜﻦ هﺬا اﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﻟﺬﻟﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Check Points‬ﻟﺤﻞ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺑﻴﻦ إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫و إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ادﺧﻞ ‪ Undo‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز و ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫اﻷﺻﻠﻲ.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Check Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ Modify Project‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪.Modify Project Database Points from Drawing‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Scan Drawing for‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) COGO Point Objects‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 27(.‬ ‫4- و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Modify Project Database‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Change points in project database‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 27(.‬ ‫- 44 -‬
  • 43. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 27‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪.Command Line‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ أﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح 2‪ F‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻠـ ‪) AutoCAD‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 37(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 37‬ ‫- 54 -‬
  • 44. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎدس: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Lesson 6: Working with Point Groups‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﺎء اﻷﺳﻄﺢ و ﻣﻬﺎم أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-6.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ‪Creating a Point Group‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ و اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺢ 2‪ Day‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺮوﺑﻴﺮ ‪ Benchmarks‬و ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺪوران اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ‪.Temporary Turning Points‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Point Management‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻌﺮض ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﺨﺘﺎرة ﻣﻨﻬﺎ.‬ ‫2- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ 2‪ DAY‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Copy Point Group‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Create Point Group‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 47(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 47‬ ‫3- ادﺧﻞ ‪ DAY2-DTM‬ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Group Name‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Exclude‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 57(.‬ ‫4- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) With Raw Desc Matching‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 57(.‬ ‫5- ادﺧﻞ 69,59,49,39,29 ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 57(.‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Apply‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 57(.‬ ‫و ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻴﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮادﻩ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 57(.‬ ‫- 64 -‬
  • 45. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 57‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﺖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫اﻷﺧﺮى ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 67(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 67‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪Creating a Point Group Using the Raw Desc‬‬ ‫‪Matching Tab‬‬ ‫إن ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Create Point Group‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Raw Desc Matching‬و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ، و اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة و اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Description Code‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪Description‬‬ ‫‪ Key Codes‬اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮوع.‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Raw Desc Matching‬اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ و ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر وﺻﻒ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ رﻣﻮز ﺷﺎذة ‪.Wildcards‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬و اﻟﺘﻲ وﺻﻔﻬﺎ هﻮ "21".‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ اﻟـ ‪ ،Point Group Manager‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Create Point Group icon‬أول أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ(‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 77( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Point Group‬‬ ‫- 74 -‬
  • 46. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 77‬ ‫2- أﻣﺎم اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Group Name‬ادﺧﻞ ‪) Borehole‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 87(.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Raw Desc Matching‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ "21" )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 87(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 87‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Apply‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪.Point List‬‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫اﻵن و ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة، ﺳﺘﻘﻮم اﻵن ﺑﻘﻔﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.‬ ‫6- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮف ﻓﻮق اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lock Point Group‬‬ ‫‪.Properties‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ أن اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ‪) Locked‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 97(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 97‬ ‫- 84 -‬
  • 47. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻬﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Applying Overrides to Point Groups‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻬﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ‪ Point Group‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪد وﺻﻒ واﺣﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫1- ﻓﻮق ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Control‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Point Group Properties‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 08(.‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Overrides‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 08(.‬ ‫3- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Description‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 08(.‬ ‫4- ادﺧﻞ ‪ Control Point‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﻤﻬﻴﻤﻦ ‪) Description override‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 08(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 08‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫أﺻﺒﺢ اﻵن وﺻﻒ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Control‬هﻮ ‪.Control Point‬‬ ‫6- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.View‬‬ ‫8- اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Control‬إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Insert‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Point Labeling‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ‪Use the Current Point Label Style When‬‬ ‫‪ Inserting Points‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 18(.‬ ‫- 94 -‬
  • 48. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 18‬ ‫11- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Insert Points to Drawing‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪.Group‬‬ ‫21- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Select a Point Group‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 28(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 28‬ ‫31- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Control‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 28( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫41- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ Point in Drawing‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Replace ALL‬‬ ‫أﺻﺒﺢ وﺻﻒ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻵن هﻮ ‪ Control Point‬آﻤﺎ هﻴﻤﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 38(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 38‬ ‫إن اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت أﺧﺮى إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ اﻟﻬﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ.‬ ‫- 05 -‬
  • 49. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Updating Point Groups‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺬف ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪Show Changes to All Point Groups‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﺮأت ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺛﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺬف اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺤﺬوﻓﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.Preferences‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪.Check Status on Startup‬‬ ‫هﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ و ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮا ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إذا ﺣﺪث ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Erase‬‬ ‫5- أدﺧﻞ ‪ N‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪.Numbers‬‬ ‫6- أدﺧﻞ 0201 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺤﺬف اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 0201.‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Management‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن هﻨﺎك ﺛﻼث ﻣﻦ أرﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت )‪ Borehole‬و 2‪ Day‬و ‪ (Day2-DTM‬ﻟﻬﻢ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ أﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻮا إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪) out-of-date‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 48(، ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ إﻟﻰ أن ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪ out-of-date‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮي ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 48‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Show Changes to All Point Groups‬ﺛﺎﻟﺚ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 48(.‬ ‫إن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮات ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Changed Point‬‬ ‫‪) Groups‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 58(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 58‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Add/Remove‬ﻳﺤﺪد ﻣﺎ هﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ، ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻳﺤﻮي ‪ Remove‬ﻷن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 0201 ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ )‪) Update Point Group(s‬أول أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 58(.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺳﻴﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ )2‪ Day‬و ‪ (Day2-DTM‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ أﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﺎن إﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪ out-of-date‬و ﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﺮض هﺬﻩ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ. هﺬا ﻷن هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻘﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ و ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪.Borehole‬‬ ‫01- اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮق اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Unlock Point Group Properties‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ أن أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻗﺪ اﺧﺘﻔﺖ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.Borehole‬‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮق اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Update‬أو اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺮاﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ آﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺳﻮﻳﺎ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 68(.‬ ‫21- أﻏﻠﻖ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫- 15 -‬
  • 50. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 86 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ - 52 -
  • 51. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ: ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪Organizing Points by Descriptions‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Description Keys‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺨﺎم ‪ Raw Descriptions‬اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮظ داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫‪ Point Database‬إﻟﻰ وﺻﻒ آﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Full Description‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ رﻣﻮز ﻣﻊ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-7.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ‪Creating a Description Key File‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ، أوﻻ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺮﻣﻮز ‪ Symbol‬ﻟﻠﻜﺘﻠﺔ ‪ Block‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إدراﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪدة ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Insert‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Search Path for Symbol Block Drawing Files‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Browse‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Browse for Folder‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select a Path‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ:‬ ‫‪C:Documents and SettingsAll UsersApplication DataAutodeskAutodesk Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪2006R16.2DataSymbol ManagerCogo_metric‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ﻳﺠﺐ أوﻻ أن ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ إﺧﻔﺎء اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫®‪ Windows‬و ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻞ ذﻟﻚ اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ:‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Start‬ﺛﻢ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Control Panel‬‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Control Panel‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Folder Options‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Folder Options‬‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ View‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Advanced Settings‬اذهﺐ إﻟﻰ ‪ Hidden files and folders‬و اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Show‬‬ ‫‪) hidden files and folders‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 78(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 78‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫- 35 -‬
  • 52. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials Use the Current Point Label Style When Inserting Points ‫ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬Point Labeling ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .(88 ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ 88 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Match on ‫ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬Matching Options ‫ و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬Description Keys ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ .(89 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Description Parameters ($1, $2, etc.) 89 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Description Key Manager ‫ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Point Management ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Points ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .Description Key Manager ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ .(90 ‫ )أول أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Create DescKey File ‫01- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬ - 54 -
  • 53. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 09‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Create Description Key File‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 19(.‬ ‫11- أدﺧﻞ ‪ CREW-B‬أﻣﺎم اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪) DescKey File name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 19( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Description Key Manager‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 19‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ‪Creating Description Keys‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ وﺻﻒ ‪ Create Description Keys‬ﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﺻﻴﻒ و اﻟﻘﻀﺒﺎن اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ و اﻷﺷﺠﺎر‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ، ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ أن أﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻷﺣﺮف ‪ case-sensitive‬ﻓﻤﺜﻼ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪TREE‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Tree‬و آﻼهﻤﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪.tree‬‬ ‫أوﻻ، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﺻﻴﻒ ‪.Edge of Pavement‬‬ ‫1- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ CREW-B‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Create DescKey‬اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 29(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 29‬ ‫2- ادﺧﻞ ‪ EP‬أﻣﺎم ‪ ،DescKey Code‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ General‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ EP‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Description Format‬و أدﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪ PNT_EP‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Point Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 39(.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Symbol Insertion‬ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Symbol Block Name‬ﺗﻌﺮض >‪ <none‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع‬ ‫إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Description Key Manager‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 39(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 39‬ ‫- 55 -‬
  • 54. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﻘﻀﺒﺎن اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ‪.Iron Bar‬‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Create DescKey‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Description Key dialog‬‬ ‫5- ادﺧﻞ ‪ IB‬أﻣﺎم ‪ ،DescKey Code‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ General‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ IB‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Description Format‬و أدﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪ PNT_IB‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Point Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 49(.‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Symbol Insertion‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Symbol Block Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ bound‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ MONUMENT‬أﻣﺎم‬ ‫‪) Symbol Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 49(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 49‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Scale/Rotate Symbol‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Scale Symbol By‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪Current Dwg‬‬ ‫0001:1 :‪) Scale‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 59(.‬ ‫8- و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Apply Scale To‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) X-Y Dimensions‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 59( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Description Key Manager‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 59‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ﻟﻸﺷﺠﺎر.‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Create DescKey‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Description Key dialog‬‬ ‫01- ادﺧﻞ ‪ Tree‬أﻣﺎم ‪ ،DescKey Code‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ General‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ $2mm $1 Tree‬أﻣﺎم ‪Description‬‬ ‫‪ Format‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ PNT_TREE‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Point Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 69(.‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ: إن هﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ $2mm $1 Tree‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ‪ ،Description Parameters‬و هﻲ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻋﺎدة‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﺺ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻪ، ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮات ﻻﺣﻘﺔ، ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ اﻷﺷﺠﺎر ﻓﺒﺈدﺧﺎل 021 ‪ Tree Maple‬آﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺳﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻬﺎ .‪.120 mm Maple Tree‬‬ ‫- 65 -‬
  • 55. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫11- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Symbol Insertion‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Symbol Block Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ tree‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ TREE‬أﻣﺎم ‪Symbol‬‬ ‫‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 69(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 69‬ ‫21- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Scale/Rotate Symbol‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Scale Symbol By‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Description Parameter‬‬ ‫و أﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ $ و أزل اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم 0001:1 :‪) Current Drawing Scale‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 79(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 79‬ ‫31- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Description Key Manager‬ﺛﻢ أﻏﻠﻖ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Description‬‬ ‫‪.Key Manager‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ اﻵن ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺛﻼث ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة.‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ‪Creating a Label Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ‪ Labels‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Description Keys‬دون اﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ‪ Labels‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit Label Styles‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‪.Edit Label Styles‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Label Styles‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) active desckeys only‬ﻻﺣﻆ اﻧﻪ ﺑﻤﺠﺮد إﺗﻤﺎم‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ (Text‬ﻓﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Text‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ أي ﻧﺼﻮص )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 89(.‬ ‫- 75 -‬
  • 56. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 98 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(99 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Name ‫ أﻣﺎم‬DescKey Only - Crew-B ‫3- أدﺧﻞ‬ ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬DescKey file ‫ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬DescKey Matching On ‫ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬Description Keys ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .(99 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬CREW-B .(99 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Insert DescKey Symbol ‫ و‬Substitute DescKey Description ‫5- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻼ ﻣﻦ‬ 99 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .OK ‫ ﺛﻢ‬Save ‫6- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ - 58 -
  • 57. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫إدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ وﺻﻒ ‪Inserting Points with Description Keys‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ، أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label Style‬اﻟﻨﺸﻂ إﻟﻰ ‪.DescKey Only- Crew-B‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Label Settings‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Labels‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ DescKey Only - Crew-B‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺬي أﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ، ﻣﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻲء اﻟﻬﺎم هﻨﺎ.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫5- ﺣﺪد أي ﻣﻜﺎن ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻷوﻟﻰ ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ EP‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 001(.‬ ‫6- ﺣﺪد أﻳﻀﺎ أي ﻣﻜﺎن ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ و أدﺧﻞ ‪ IB‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 001(.‬ ‫7- ﺣﺪد ﻣﻜﺎن ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و أدﺧﻞ 021 ‪ Tree Maple‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 001(.‬ ‫8- ﺣﺪد ﻣﻜﺎن ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺮاﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و أدﺧﻞ 003 ‪ Tree Oak‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 001(.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮم اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻴﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎت ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪.Description Key Definitions‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 001‬ ‫- 95 -‬
  • 58. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ: اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ASCII‬اﻟﻨﺼﻲ ‪Lesson 8: Importing Points from an ASCII Text File‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ هﻴﺌﺎت ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮوع، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ هﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ هﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ، ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء هﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ‪ ASCII‬و ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إﻟﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 2‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-8.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء هﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط ‪Creating a Point File Format‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء هﻴﺌﺔ ‪ Format‬ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ هﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺮاد اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻨﻪ، و ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻴﻜﻮن‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ: ‪ Northing‬ﺛﻢ ‪ Easting‬ﺛﻢ ‪ Elevation‬ﺛﻢ ‪.Description‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Import/Export Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Format Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Format Manager‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 101(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 101‬ ‫2- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Add‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Format Manager - Select Format Type‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 201(.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) User Point File‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 201( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Point File‬‬ ‫‪.Format‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 201‬ ‫4- ادﺧﻞ ‪ Tutorial‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Format Name‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﻣﺘﺪاد اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Default Extension‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ .txt‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ !‬ ‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ‪ (Exclamation Point‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Comment Tag‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 301(.‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺮك ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﻣﺘﺪاد اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Default Extension‬ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻣﺘﺪاد اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ.‬ ‫- 06 -‬
  • 59. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Delimited By‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ Delimited By‬ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ أي ﻧﺺ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 301(.‬ ‫هﺬا ﻳﻌﻨﻲ أن هﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ و هﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت ‪ ،Space Delimited‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ هﺬا اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ آﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ‪ Comma‬أو أي ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ‪ Punctuation‬آﻔﺎﺻﻞ.‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Load‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Source File‬ﺛﻢ اذهﺐ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ:‬ ‫‪Land Projects 2006Tutorial2Survey‬‬ ‫و اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ Topo_pnt.txt‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Open‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻷﺳﻄﺮ اﻷوﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 301(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 301‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد ﻧﻮع اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮد ﻟﻴﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ هﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ.‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أول >‪ <unused‬رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 201( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض - ‪Format Manager‬‬ ‫‪) Select Column Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 401(.‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Column Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Point File‬‬ ‫‪) Format‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 401(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 401‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <unused‬ﻓﻲ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Format Manager - Select Column‬‬ ‫‪.Name‬‬ ‫- 16 -‬
  • 60. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point File Format‬‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <unused‬ﻓﻲ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Format Manager - Select Column‬‬ ‫‪.Name‬‬ ‫21- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Elevation‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point File Format‬‬ ‫31- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <unused‬ﻓﻲ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Format Manager - Select Column‬‬ ‫‪.Name‬‬ ‫41- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Description‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point File Format‬‬ ‫51- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Parse‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﻋﻤﺪة اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 501(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 501‬ ‫61- ﺗﺼﻔﺢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت و ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ Format‬اﻟﺬي أﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت داﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ.‬ ‫71- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪ Format Manager‬و ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ Tutorial‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 601(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 601‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬا ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪ أﻧﻬﻴﺖ ﺧﻄﻮات إﻋﺪاد هﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.‬ ‫- 26 -‬
  • 61. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials Importing an ASCII Text Point File ‫ ﻧﺼﻲ‬ASCII ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ .‫ إﻟﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و اﻟﺮﺳﻢ أﻳﻀﺎ‬ASCII ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬Import Options ‫ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Import/Export Points ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Points ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .COGO Database Import Options ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ Use ‫ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬What to do when point numbers need to be assigned to the points ‫2- ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم‬ .(107 ‫ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬next point number 107 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬Import Points ‫ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Import/Export Points ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Points ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .Format Manager - Import Points ‫اﻟﺤﻮار‬ .(108 ‫ هﻮ: )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Source File ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن‬Tutorial ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Format ‫4- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ Land Projects 2006Tutorial2SurveyTopo_pnt.txt. Create New Point ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 801( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬Add Points to Point Group ‫5- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ .Format Manager - Create Group ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬Group 108 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Format ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 901( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Name ‫ أﻣﺎم‬Topo_Area1 ‫6- أدﺧﻞ‬ COGO Database Import ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Manager - Import Points .Options 109 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ - 63 -
  • 62. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫7- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻐﻠﻖ ‪ COGO Database Import Options‬و ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت و إدراﺟﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 011(.‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 011‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ List Points‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.List Points‬‬ ‫01- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Enable Filtering‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 111(.‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Reset‬ﻟﺘﻤﺤﻮ اﺧﺘﻴﺎرك اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 111(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 111‬ ‫- 46 -‬
  • 63. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫21- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Groups‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط 1‪ Topo_Area‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) List‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫211(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 211‬ ‫31- ﺑﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 56 -‬
  • 64. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ: ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻷﺷﻜﺎل اﻟﺤﻠﺰوﻧﻴﺔ و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ,‪Lesson 9: Labeling Lines, Curves‬‬ ‫‪Spirals and Points‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻷﺷﻜﺎل اﻟﺤﻠﺰوﻧﻴﺔ و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻒ اﻟﺤﻮاﺷﻲ إﻟﻰ رﺳﻤﻚ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ و اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ و أﻧﺼﺎف‬ ‫اﻷﻗﻄﺎر.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-9.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Changing Label Settings‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺤﺪد إﻋﺪادات ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label Settings‬اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Label Settings‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ General‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Update Labels When Objects Change‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 311(.‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Update Labels When Objects Change‬ﻓﺈن اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ ‪ Dynamic Labels‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ‪ Object‬اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 311‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line Labels‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪direction above, distance‬‬ ‫‪) below‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 411(.‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Forced Bearings‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) North‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 411(.‬ ‫- 66 -‬
  • 65. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 114 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ stacked above - radius, ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Current Label Style ‫ و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬Curve Labels ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ .(115 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬length, tan, delta 115 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 611( ﺛﻢ‬all point data ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Current Label Style ‫ و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬Point Labels ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ .OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ 116 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ - 67 -
  • 66. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Labeling Lines and Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﺰل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺘﻴﻦ ‪ Boundary‬و ‪ Pnt_control‬و ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻟـ ‪ Boundary‬و ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪Control‬‬ ‫‪.Points‬‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ادﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺤﺪود اﻷزرق و أي ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 711( ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ ،Layer(s) to isolate‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺘﻴﻦ أﻣﺎم اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ ‪Enter Item‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 811( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 711‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 811‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻷدوات ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Layer Manager‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Boundary_label‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﺎ آﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪) Current Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 911( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 86 -‬
  • 67. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 911‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Static Labels‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺤﺪود اﻟﺰرﻗﺎء و اﻟﺴﺖ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 021(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 021‬ ‫ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label‬إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬ﻓﺈن آﺎﻧﺖ ‪ Static Label‬وﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ‪ Explode‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط‬ ‫‪ Polyline‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻞ اﻟـ ‪ Static Label‬آﻤﺎ هﻮ أﻣﺎ ﻟﻮ آﺎﻧﺖ ‪ Dynamic Label‬و ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ‪ Explode‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط‬ ‫‪ Polyline‬ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ اﻟـ ‪.Dynamic Label‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻘﺪم )'( ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ أن وﺣﺪات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ هﻲ اﻟﻤﺘﺮ و هﺬا ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Label Style‬‬ ‫‪ Definition‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ هﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ، أﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ آﻼ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺗﻢ‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Boundary_label‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر ﺣﺪد ﻟﻴﻀﻊ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ.‬ ‫5- ادﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ LOA‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ آﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺰل ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ‪ Lots‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻨﻮن ﺧﻄﻮط ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ.‬ ‫6- أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﺎن ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ ،Layer(s) to isolate‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Layers‬اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ LOT_LINES‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 121(.‬ ‫- 96 -‬
  • 68. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 121‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻷدوات ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Layer Manager‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Lot_label‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﺎ آﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪) Current Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 121( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 221‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Show Dialog Bar‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Style Properties‬‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Curve‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) length above, radius below‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 321(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 321‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫11- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Dynamic Labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ آﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫421(.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﺧﻄﻮط ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ و ﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﺪاﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻮق ﺑﻌﺾ.‬ ‫- 07 -‬
  • 69. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 421‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻜﺎﺋﻦ ‪Changing a Label Attached to an Object‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻳﻀﺔ اﻟﻨﺺ ﺣﻮل ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ آﺎﺋﻦ و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪.Label Style‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Swap Label Text‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 421 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 521(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 521‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﺨﻂ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ أرض ‪.Lot‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Style Properties‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪) stacked below - direction, distance‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 621(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 621‬ ‫3- اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Delete Labels‬‬ ‫إن اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Delete Labels‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺬف اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر ﻋﻠﻰ أي ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت.‬ ‫- 17 -‬
  • 70. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Enter ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Add Dynamic Labels ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Labels ‫4- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .(127 127 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ - 72 -
  • 71. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ: إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Lesson 10: Creating Label Styles for Lines and‬‬ ‫‪Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻘﻚ اﻟﺨﺎص ﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط واﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻟﺤﻠﺰون و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗــﺎﺋــﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــﺘـــﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــﺘــــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-10.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ‪Creating a New Line Label Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ و إدﻣﺎج اﻟﻄﻮل ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺗﻲ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﻤﺘﺮ و اﻟﻘﺪم ﻓﻮق اﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪم و ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﺨﻂ ﺳﺘﻀﻊ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ ‪ X‬و ‪ Y‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻲ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ و اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit Label Styles‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Label Styles‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line Label Styles‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Name List‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) distance above, direction below‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 821(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 821‬ ‫3- ادﺧﻞ ‪ Lot Plan for XYZ Co‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 921(.‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Above‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬف ﻋﻼﻣﺔ وﺣﺪة اﻟﻘﺪم )'( اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ }‪ {Length‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺛﻢ ‪) m‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 921(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 921‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ '}48082.3*‪) {Length‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 031(.‬ ‫- 37 -‬
  • 72. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮات زاﺋﺪة ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺪرج أﺳﻄﺮ زاﺋﺪة ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ‪ Text Above‬أو اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ ،Text Below‬ﻓﻬﺬا ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﻬﻮر ﻓﻲ أﺳﻄﺮ ﻓﺎرﻏﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﺺ و اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻮن.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 031‬ ‫6- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Below‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬف }‪.{Direction‬‬ ‫7- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Below‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ N‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ، و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Start Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪>> Text Below‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 131(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 131‬ ‫8- ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ أﺿﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ E‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟـ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Start Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text Below‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 231(.‬ ‫- 47 -‬
  • 73. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 231‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫9- ﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻨﺺ}‪ ({Start Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫01- أدﺧﻞ ‪ N‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ End Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text Below‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 331(.‬ ‫11- ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ أﺿﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺛﻢ ادﺧــﻞ ‪ E‬ﺛــﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ أﺧﺮى و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ End Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿــﻐﻂ ﻋـﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪) >> Text Below‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 331(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 331‬ ‫21- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬أدﺧﻞ 5.0 أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪ Offset‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ 001‪ L‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ Lot_label‬أﻣﺎم‬ ‫‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 431(.‬ ‫- 57 -‬
  • 74. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 431‬ ‫31- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Units‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Linear‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Linear Units‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 531(.‬ ‫41- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ precision‬ادﺧﻞ 3 أﻣﺎم ‪ Linear‬و ادﺧﻞ 4 أﻣﺎم ‪) Coordinates‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 531(، ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع‬ ‫إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Label Styles‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 531‬ ‫51- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫هﻜﺬا ﻗﺪ أﺗﻤﻤﺖ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط.‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻂ ‪Labeling a Line‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺬي أﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Show Dialog Bar‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Style Properties‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Lot Plan for XYZ Co‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Dynamic Labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺬي أﻣﺎﻣﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 631(.‬ ‫- 67 -‬
  • 75. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 631‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ اﻵن ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ، و ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻮق اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻄﻮل ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺘﺎر و اﻟﻘﺪم، و ﻣﻦ أﺳﻔﻠﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ آﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻲ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ و‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ.‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ‪ Curve and Spiral‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ اﺗﺒﻌﺖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺨﻂ.‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ‪Creating a New Point Label Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ أرآﺎن ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ‪.Lot Corner Elevation‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Label Styles‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Label Styles‬‬ ‫2- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Label Styles‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ Lot Corner Elevations‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 731(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 731‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Elevation‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 831(.‬ ‫- 77 -‬
  • 76. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 831‬ ‫4- ﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻨﺺ }‪ {Elevation‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 931(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 931‬ ‫6- ﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻨﺺ }‪ {Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 041(.‬ ‫- 87 -‬
  • 77. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 041‬ ‫8- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬ادﺧﻞ 1 أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪ Offset‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Justification‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺰر اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻷزرار اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻮل اﻟﺤﺮف ‪) X‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 141(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 141‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ 08‪ L‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Lot_elevation_label‬أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 241(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 241‬ ‫01- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫هﻜﺬا ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪ أﺗﻤﻤﺖ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط.‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪Labeling a Point‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Label a Point‬و ﺑﻌﺪهﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﻐﻠﻖ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.Point Marker Text‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 97 -‬
  • 78. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Style Properties‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lot‬‬ ‫‪) Corner Elevations‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 341(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 341‬ ‫3- اﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 64 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Add Dynamic Labels‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 441(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 441‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫4- اﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 64 ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Display Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Text‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Visible‬و أﻣﺎم اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ‪ Number‬و ‪ Elevation‬و‬ ‫‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 541( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫- 08 -‬
  • 79. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 541‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ اﻵن ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و آﺬﻟﻚ إزاﻟﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 641(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 641‬ ‫- 18 -‬
  • 80. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺤﺎدي ﻋﺸﺮ: إﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ و ﺟﺪاول ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪Lesson 11: Creating Tag Labels and Object‬‬ ‫‪Tables‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ أو اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ أو اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ﻗﺒﻞ أن ﺗﻨﺸﺊ ﺟﺪاول ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت، ﻓﺒﻤﺠﺮد أن ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺟﺪاول ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت )ﺟﺪاول ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت(.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋـﻤــﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧـــﺘـــﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــــﺘــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-11.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Creating a New Tag Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ و ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ‪ Parameters‬ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit Tag Styles‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Tag Label Styles‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line Label Styles‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ Boundary Tags for XYZ Co‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 741(.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style List‬اﺧﺘﺮ 002‪ L‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Boundary_tags‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫741(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 741‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Curve Label Styles‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ Boundary Tags for XYZ Co‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫841(.‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style‬أﺧﺘﺮ 002‪ L‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ Boundary_tags‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫841(.‬ ‫- 28 -‬
  • 81. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 841‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﺛﻢ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫هﻜﺬا ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪ أﻧﻬﻴﺖ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ.‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Labeling Objects with Tags‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﺰل ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟـ ‪ Boundary‬و ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬اﻟﺤﺪود ﺑﻨﺴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺤﺪود اﻷزرق ‪ Blue Polyline‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪ Layer(s) to isolate‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Show Dialog Bar‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Style Properties‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 941(.‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label‬ﻟﺘﺘﺤﻮل إﻟﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ ،Tag‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Tag Style‬أﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪) Boundary Tags for XYZ Co‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 941(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 941‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Curve‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Tag Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Boundary Tags for XYZ Co‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫051(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 051‬ ‫- 38 -‬
  • 82. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Tag Labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ آﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 151(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 151‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺗﺮى ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ آﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ.‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ‪Creating a Line Table‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Tag Label‬ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ، ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺠﺪول ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮدﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت )إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ‪ Y‬و إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ‪ (X‬إﻟﻰ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Add Tables‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Line Table‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Line‬‬ ‫‪.Table Definition‬‬ ‫3- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Table Title‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Text Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ 005‪) L‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 251(.‬ ‫- 48 -‬
  • 83. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 152 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ No ‫، أﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻓﻮق رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ و اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ‬Column Definition ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ -4 .(153 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Column #4 – Definition ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 251( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬Column .(153 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Header ‫ أﻣﺎم‬START NORTHING ‫ أدﺧﻞ‬Column Header Information ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ -5 Text ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ﻗﺴﻢ‬Add Value ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Start Northing ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Display Value Information ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ -6 .(153 ‫{ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Start Northing} ‫ﻳﻌﺮض‬ .Linear Units ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 351( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬Linear ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Units ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ -7 - 85 -
  • 84. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 153 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Column #4 – ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 451( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Coordinate ‫8- أدﺧﻞ 4 أﻣﺎم‬ .Definition 154 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .Line Table Definition ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ No ‫، أﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻓﻮق رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ و اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ‬Column Definition ‫01- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .(155 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Column #5 – Definition ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬Column .(155 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Header ‫ أﻣﺎم‬START EASTING ‫ أدﺧﻞ‬Column Header Information ‫11- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ Text ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ﻗﺴﻢ‬Add Value ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Start Easting ‫ أﺧﺘﺮ‬Display Value Information ‫21- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .(155 ‫{ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Start Easting} ‫ﻳﻌﺮض‬ - 86 -
  • 85. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 551‬ ‫31- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Line Table Definition‬‬ ‫41- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Line Table Definition‬‬ ‫51- أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدراج اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻴﻬﺎ، اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺪول ﺳﻴﻜﻮن ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 651(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 651‬ ‫61- ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ أو اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺮؤﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺠﺪول.‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 651 ﻋﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻨﺪك أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر.‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ‪Creating a Point Table‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ واﺣﺪة.‬ ‫- 78 -‬
  • 86. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ Lesson-3.dwg‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع 2‪.Tutorial‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Table‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Table‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Points‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 751(.‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Groups‬و اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪) Control‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 751(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 751‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ List‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ إﻟﻰ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 851(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 851‬ ‫5- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Summary‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻋﺪد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ إﻟﻰ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 951(.‬ ‫- 88 -‬
  • 87. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 159 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(160 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Point Table Definition ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .(160 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Text ‫ أﻣﺎم‬MY POINT TABLE ‫ أدﺧﻞ‬Table Title ‫7- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬No Column ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ و اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ‬Column Definition ‫8- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .Column #4 – Definition ‫061( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ 160 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(161 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Header ‫ أﻣﺎم‬NORTHING ‫ ادﺧﻞ‬Column Header Information ‫9- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ Text ‫، ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻘﺴﻢ‬Add Value ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Northing ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Display Value Information ‫01- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .(161 ‫{ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Northing} ‫ﻳﻌﺮض‬ - 89 -
  • 88. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 161 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .Point Table Definition ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫11- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ‬No Column ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ و اﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎة‬Column Definition ‫21- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .Column #5 – Definition ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 261( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ 162 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(163 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Header ‫ أﻣﺎم‬EASTING ‫ ادﺧﻞ‬Column Header Information ‫31- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ - 90 -
  • 89. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫41- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Display Value Information‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Add Value‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Text‬ﻳﻌﺮض‬ ‫}‪) {Easting‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 361(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 361‬ ‫51- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Table Definition‬‬ ‫61- ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Point Table Definition‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫71- أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدراج اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻴﻬﺎ، اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﺳﻴﻜﻮن ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 461(.‬ ‫81- ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ أو اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺮؤﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺠﺪول.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 461‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺗﺮى ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 742 و 857 ﻷﻧﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ، اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إدراﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول.‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ )إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ( ﺟﺪول ‪Updating (Re-drawing) an Object Table‬‬ ‫إن أﻣﺮ ‪ Re-Draw Table‬ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻚ ﺗﺤﺪث ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـﺨﻂ ‪ Line‬أو ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ‪ Curve‬أو ﺣﻠﺰون ‪ ،Spiral‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل‬ ‫ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ‪ Line Table‬و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت 02 ﺧﻂ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﺬف ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﺈن‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ، ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Re-Draw Table‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺠﺪول ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع 1‪ Tutorial‬و ﻣﻨﻪ اﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪.Lesson-11.dwg‬‬ ‫2- ﻓﻲ درس ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط )إن ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط(.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ أي ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط و ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﺠﺪول ﻣﺎزال ﻳﻌﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط.‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Tables‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Re-Draw Table‬‬ ‫- 19 -‬
  • 90. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻪ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،Enter‬ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﺠﺪول ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ، و ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬف ﺻﻔﻮف اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻤﺤﺬوﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫إن اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Re-Draw Table‬ﻳﺤﺪث آﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل أو اﻟﺸﺮق‬ ‫‪ Northing or Easting‬ﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻓﺈن اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Re-Draw Table‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت.‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻢ اﻟﺠﺪول آﻜﺎﺋﻦ ‪Understanding Table Objects‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﻌﺮف اﻟﻔﺮق ﺑﻴﻦ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺠﺪاول ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Create Table Object‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Table‬‬ ‫‪ Definition‬و اﻟﺠﺪاول اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام هﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر.‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع 1‪ Tutorial‬و ﻣﻨﻪ اﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪.Lesson-11.dwg‬‬ ‫2- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Create Table Object‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط اﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ(، و أدﺧﻞ ‪ NOT TABLE OBJECT‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻨﺺ أﻣﺎم ‪) Text‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‪(Table Title‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 561(، ﺛﻢ أدرج هﺬا اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 661(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 561‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 661‬ ‫3- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و ﻟﻜﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺮة أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Table Object‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Line Table‬‬ ‫‪) Definition‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ(،ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Table Object‬أدﺧﻞ ‪TABLE‬‬ ‫‪ OBJECT‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Layer‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ IS TABLE OBJECT‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻨﺺ أﻣﺎم ‪) Text‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‪) (Table Title‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 761(.‬ ‫4- أدرج هﺬا اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ أو ﻓﻮﻗﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 861(.‬ ‫- 29 -‬
  • 91. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 761‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 861‬ ‫5- ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ NOT TABLE OBJECT‬أﺧﺘﺮ أي ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺠﺪول. ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺬي ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ هﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻩ و ﻟﻴﺲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﺑﺄآﻤﻠﻪ و ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ هﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ ﺳﻴﺘﺤﺮك ﺑﻤﻔﺮدﻩ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 961(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 961‬ ‫6- ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ IS TABLE OBJECT‬أﺧﺘﺮ أي ﺧﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺪول و ﻻﺣﻆ اﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺠﺪول ﺑﺄآﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫و ﻟﻴﺲ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺬي ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ و إن ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ هﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﺤﺮك اﻟﺠﺪول ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 071(.‬ ‫- 39 -‬
  • 92. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 071‬ ‫7- ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ IS TABLE OBJECT‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺪاول أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺠﺪول ﺑﺄآﻤﻠﻪ و اﺳﺤﺐ اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 171(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 171‬ ‫8- ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ NOT TABLE OBJECT‬أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺠﺪول ﺑﺄآﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻮاء ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Window‬أو ‪Cross‬‬ ‫‪ ،Selection‬وﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺪاول ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻣﺎزال ﻣﺨﺘﺎرا ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أي ﺟﺰء ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ أﺳﺤﺒﻪ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدراﺟﻪ ﻓﻴﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 271(.‬ ‫- 49 -‬
  • 93. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 172 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ - 95 -
  • 94. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ: اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻷرض‪Lesson 12: Working with the Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻷرض ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻤﻮذج رﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻸرض ‪Digital Terrain Model‬‬ ‫)‪ (DTMs‬ﻣﻦ أي ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎوي( و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر و ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣــﻦ ﻗﺎﺋـﻤـﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧـــﺘــــﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــــﺘــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-12.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪Creating a New Surface Folder‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫2- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و أﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Create New Surface‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 371(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 371‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻋﻄﺎء اﻻﺳﻢ 1‪ Surface‬ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ و ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪) Terrain‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 471(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 471‬ ‫- 69 -‬
  • 95. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫3- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ 1‪ Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 471(.‬ ‫4- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ )+( ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﺳﻢ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ آﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻣﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 471 ﻟﺘﺴـﺘﻌـــﺮض اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪TIN‬‬ ‫‪) Data‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 571(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 571‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ Surface‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Rename‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Rename Surface‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 671(.‬ ‫6- أدﺧﻞ 1‪ Area‬ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ New surface name‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 671(.‬ ‫اﻵن أﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 671‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Adding Point Data‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ.‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ 1‪ Area‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪.TIN data‬‬ ‫2- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Point Groups‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Point Group‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Add Point Group‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 771(.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Point group name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ Area‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 771(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 771‬ ‫- 79 -‬
  • 96. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 871(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 871‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ‪Adding Contour Data‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻹﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﺣﻖ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺬي أﻧﺸﺊ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ و ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪم اﻟﺨﻠﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ هﺬﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﻔﻬﻮﻣﻴﻦ، ﻓﻜﻤﺎ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ أن اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻧﺸﺎؤﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط أو ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﺈن‬ ‫آﻨﺖ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و أﻧﺸﺄت ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط )ﺧﻄﻮط‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر( اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ )ﻓﻬﻲ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ أو أﻧﺸﺄت ﺑﻌﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ(، أﻣﺎ ﻟﻮ آﻨﺖ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر و ﻻ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط )ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر( و ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﺎ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺗﻤﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت و رﺳﻢ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ 1‪ Area‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contours‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Contour Weeding‬‬ ‫2- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ Weeding factors‬و ‪) Supplementing factors‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 971(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 971‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Layer‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ أي ﺧﻂ آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 081(.‬ ‫- 89 -‬
  • 97. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 081‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 181(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 181‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط ‪Adding Breakline Data from Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط و ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪ 2D Polyline‬و ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‬ ‫‪ 3D Polyline‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮدﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ، ﻗﻢ أوﻻ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ‪ Breakline‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ‪ Centerline‬ﻟﻘﺎع اﻟﻨﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪.Streambed‬‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎ.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫3- أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ إﺣﺪى ﻧﻘﺎط ﺧﻂ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻗﺎع اﻟﻨﻬﺮ ‪) Streambed Centerline‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰهﺎ ﺑﻠﻮن‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Marker‬و هﻮ اﻷزرق اﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ‪ Cyan‬و وﺻﻔﻬﺎ ‪ Description‬و هﻮ ‪) Strm Bed‬اﻧﻈﺮ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 281((. ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Layer(s) to isolate‬‬ ‫- 99 -‬
  • 98. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 281‬ ‫4- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ‪ STREAM_PNTS‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق ‪ Enter Item‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻌﺰل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫381(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 381‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Define‬‬ ‫‪.by Point‬‬ ‫6- أﺧﺘﺮ أول ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎع اﻟﻨﻬﺮ ﺛﻢ أﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ أﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ و ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Enter‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 481(.‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ 1952 و اﻟﻤﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺪاﺋﺮة ﺣﻤﺮاء ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 481 ﺣﻴﺚ أﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻘﺎع اﻟﻨﻬﺮ.‬ ‫- 001 -‬
  • 99. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺨﺘﺮ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 481‬ ‫7- أدﺧﻞ ‪ Streambed‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ.‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Terrain Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ No‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬ ‫ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر و ﺗﻜﻮن آﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻗﻤﺔ أو رأس ‪ Vertex‬ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 581(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 581‬ ‫- 101 -‬
  • 100. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 681(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 681‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪Adding Breakline Data from 3D Polylines‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﺮف ﺣﺎﻓﺔ رﺻﻴﻒ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ‪Roadway‬‬ ‫‪.Edge of Pavement‬‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ LOA‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﺪ آﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﻈﻬﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫3- أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ )ﻣﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 781( ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Layer(s) to isolate‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 781‬ ‫4- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ‪ EOP_3D‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق ‪ Enter Item‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 881(.‬ ‫- 201 -‬
  • 101. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 881‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪Define by‬‬ ‫‪.Polyline‬‬ ‫7- أدﺧﻞ ‪ Existing_Road_EOP‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ أﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ ،Crossing Box‬و ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻟﺨﻄﻮط.‬ ‫8- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Terrain Breaklines‬و ﻣﻨﻪ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ No‬ﻟﻌﺪم ﺣﺬف أي ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﻜﺴﺎر‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ و ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 981(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 981‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪Adding Breakline Data from 2D Polylines‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪ 2D Polylines‬و اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ رﺳﻤﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ رﺻﻴﻒ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫‪ Roadway edge of pavement‬و اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪ Ditch‬و أرض أﺳﺎس اﻟﺴﻜﺔ اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Railway Bed‬‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ LOA‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﺪ آﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﻈﻬﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫2- أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Layer(s) to isolate‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Layers‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2D_Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 091( ﻟﺘﻌﺰل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪.2D_Breaklines‬‬ ‫- 301 -‬
  • 102. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 091‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟـ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Breaklines‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.Proximity by Polylines‬‬ ‫5- أدﺧﻞ ‪ Misc_Topo‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Description‬ﺛﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟـ ‪ Cross Box‬أﺧﺘﺮ آﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪2D‬‬ ‫‪ Polylines‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻞ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Terrain Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪No‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 191(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 191‬ ‫7- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ أﺧﺮى إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ، أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر و ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر هﺬﻩ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬أﻳﻀﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 291(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 291‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 391(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 391‬ ‫- 401 -‬
  • 103. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪Adding Surface Boundary Data‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺤﺪود ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ LOA‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎع آﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Boundaries‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Add‬‬ ‫‪.Boundary Definition‬‬ ‫3- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻷﺑﻴﺾ )اﻟﻤﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 491( و اﻟﺬي ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ اﻷرض، ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ 1‪ Area‬ﻟﻼﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 491‬ ‫4- ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﺤﺪ ‪ Boundary Type‬اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ و هﻮ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ‪.Outer‬‬ ‫5- ادﺧﻞ ‪ No‬ﻟـ ‪ making breaklines along edges‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻨﻬﻲ اﻷﻣﺮ و ﺗﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪Terrain‬‬ ‫‪.Model Explorer‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ‪ Breaklines‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل اﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺈن اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت داﺧﻞ ﺣﺪ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ Surface Boundary‬هﻲ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟـ ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 591(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 591‬ ‫- 501 -‬
  • 104. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ ‪Building a Surface‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺒﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ ‪ Build a Surface‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر و ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬أﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ Area‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Build‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار 1‪.Build Area‬‬ ‫2- أدﺧﻞ 1‪ Area‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ) اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 691(.‬ ‫3- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Surface Data Options‬أزل اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Use point file data‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪Minimize flat‬‬ ‫‪) triangles resulting from contour data‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 691(.‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ آﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 691‬ ‫5- ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Build Progress‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺒﻨﺎء اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫791(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 791‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ ،Terrain Model Explorer‬و اﻵن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻟﻸرض ﺗﻢ ﺑﻨﺎؤﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻤﺜﻼ ﻇﺮوف اﻷرض اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 891(.‬ ‫- 601 -‬
  • 105. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 198 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﻠﻘﻬﺎ‬Terrain Model Explorer ‫6- ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة‬ - 107 -
  • 106. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ‪Lesson 13: Editing Surfaces‬‬ ‫إن دﻗﺔ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ دﻗﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ، ﻓﺈن آﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ )ﻓﻲ اﻷرﺟﺢ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻧﻘﺎط(‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮة و ﻏﻴﺮ آﺜﻴﻔﺔ و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻧﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ أﻓﻀﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻏﺎﻣﺾ أو ﻣﻠﺘﺒﺲ، ﺣﺘﻰ و إن آﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ‬ ‫آﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻤﻦ اﻟﻤﻬﻢ اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻇﺮوف اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ.‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺎت ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﻣﺬآﻮرة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺪرس( ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت أﺧﺮى و هﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺬآﻮرة ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــﺘــﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋــﻤــﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧـــﺘــــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-13.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ‪Identifying Triangulation Problems‬‬ ‫إن ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ أوﻻ ﺷﻲء أﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻻ ﻏﻨﻰ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺎآﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ، و ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ رﺳﻤﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮر ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻔﻴﺪ أو ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮ آﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻴﻜﻮن أﻓﻀﻞ.‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮق ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺎآﻞ ﺑﻨﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ أن ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و ﺗﺮى أﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﻈﻮاهﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ‪Ridgelines‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺗﻼل أو ﺟﺒﺎل( أو ﻗﻴﻌﺎن اﻷﻧﻬﺎر ‪ Streambeds‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺑﺎﻷهﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺒﺎرزة و اﻟﻐﻴﺮ هﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ، و اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ هﻲ أن ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﺗﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺄآﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ ،Select Surface‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Area1b‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 991(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 991‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮى ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ دون إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أي آﺎﺋﻦ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪.Quick View‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Surface Display‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Quick View‬‬ ‫- 801 -‬
  • 107. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ رﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت ﺑﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ.‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺪاﺋﺮة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 002( )ﻻﺣﻆ أن هﺬا اﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻨﺎؤﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر( ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﺧﻄﻮط‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت ﺗﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻲ آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﺘﺴﺎوﻳﺎن ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب و ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ هﺬا ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ، ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪد اﻷﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ و ﻟﻜﻦ أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﺪوي ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺸﺎآﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪوﺛﻬﺎ، أﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﺼﺎﺣﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺴﺘﻮي أو ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﺤﺪر ﺑﺸﺪة و هﺬا ﻻ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺷﻜﻞ اﻟﻤﻴﻞ اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ.‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Redraw‬ﻟﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 002‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ‪Adding Points to the Surface‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻓﻲ أي وﻗﺖ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت، ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إﻟﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ذاﺗﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة.‬ ‫أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮاد أﺿﻼع اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ آﺨﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪.3D Lines‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Import 3D Lines‬‬ ‫2- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ و هﻮ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺘﻤﺴﺢ أﺿﻼع ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ.‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ أن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ذات ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ﻣﺘﺴﺎوي و هﻮ 221 ﻣﺘﺮ، أﺿﻒ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻲ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )ﻣﺮآﺰ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة رﻗﻢ 1( و ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ 5.121 ﻣﺘﺮ.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Add Point‬‬ ‫4- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Center Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺮآﺰ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة رﻗﻢ 1، و ادﺧﻞ 5.121 ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ و أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ و ﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﻄﺤﺔ ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 102(.‬ ‫- 901 -‬
  • 108. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 102‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أو ﺣﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت ‪Adding and Deleting TIN Lines‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﺧﻄﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﺢ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ اﻟﻤﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬ﺛﻢ ‪.Add Line‬‬ ‫2- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ رؤوس أﺿﻼع اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت داﺧﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة 1 آﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ‪ From point‬ﺛﻢ رؤوس‬ ‫أﺿﻼع اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت داﺧﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة رﻗﻢ 2 آﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ To point‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ 1 و 2 و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ هﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 202(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 202‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮط ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت اﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ أو اﻟﺪﺧﻴﻠﺔ، أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻔﻀﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻴﺔ و ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ.‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬف اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻔﻀﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ إﻟﻲ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ 2.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2B‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 011 -‬
  • 109. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Delete Line‬‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻔﻀﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 302(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 302‬ ‫ﻗﻠﺐ أوﺟﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت ‪Flipping TIN Faces‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 3 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫إن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷزرق اﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ‪ Cyan‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺤﺪة )ذات ﻧﺘﻮء ﺣﺎد( ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 3 و 4، ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﻠﺐ أوﺟﻪ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 3 و 4.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Flip Face‬‬ ‫3- أﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ 3 و 4 ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 402-ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻠﺐ(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 402‬ ‫- 111 -‬
  • 110. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎدة إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﺘﺮى اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ.‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Contours‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Contours‬‬ ‫5- أﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 502(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 502‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ Yes‬آﺨﻴﺎر اﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﺤﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪.erase old contours‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت و ﺳﺘﺮى أن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ اﻧﺴﻴﺎﺑﻲ و‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺣﺎد )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 602(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 602‬ ‫- 211 -‬
  • 111. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪Applying Surface Edit History‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ أن ﺗﻢ ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ، ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ إﻟﻰ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر، و ﻋﻨﺪ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أي ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط‬ ‫اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻓﻴﺠﺐ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى، و ﻳﺠﺐ هﺬا أﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أو ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪Surface‬‬ ‫‪.Editing‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ و إﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺛﻢ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎؤﻩ.‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ، ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Apply Edit History‬ﻓﺈن ذﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺒﻨﻲ ﺳﻄﺤﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪا و ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ أﻣﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ دون اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Apply Edit History‬ﻓﺈن ذﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ إﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ.‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫1-‬ ‫أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Area1b‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Build‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Surface‬‬ ‫2-‬ ‫‪.Modified‬‬ ‫أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ أن اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻗﺪ ﻋﺪل و ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Build Area1b‬‬ ‫3-‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ‪ Area1b‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ، ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Surface Data Options‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻼ ﻣﻦ ‪ Surface Data Options‬و‬ ‫4-‬ ‫‪ Use breakline data‬و ‪) Use contour data‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 702(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 702‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ آﻼ ﻣﻦ ‪ Minimize flat triangles resulting from contour data‬و ‪) Apply Edit History‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫702( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎؤﻩ.‬ ‫6- ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﺛﻢ أﻏﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Surface Edit‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ،Import 3D Lines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪ Yes‬آﺨﻴﺎر اﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﺤﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪.Erase old surface view‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ.‬ ‫- 311 -‬
  • 112. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ: إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Lesson 14: Creating Contours‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر آﻤﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬أو آﻜﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر ‪ ،Contour Object‬إن اﺳﺘﺨﺪام آﺎﺋﻨﺎت اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ أﺻﻐﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ و ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻣﺮوﻧﺔ أآﺒﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ آﺘﺎﺑﺔ إﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر(.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣـﻦ ﻗﺎﺋــﻤـــﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــﺘﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋــﻤـــﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧـــﺘـﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-14.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Creating Contours‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ و هﻮ اﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ Standard Style‬اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Contour Style Manager‬آﺨﻴﺎر اﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ، ﺳﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ رأﺳﻲ 5 ﻣﺘﺮ و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ رأﺳﻲ 1 ﻣﺘﺮ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Surface‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) AREA1C‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 802( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 802‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Contours‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Create Contours‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 902(.‬ ‫2-‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Intervals‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Both Minor and Major‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 902(.‬ ‫3-‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Minor Interval‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﺘﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ هﻲ ‪ CONT-MNR‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 902(.‬ ‫4-‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Major Interval‬اﺧﺘﺮ 5 ﻣﺘﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ هﻲ ‪ CONT-MJR‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 902(.‬ ‫5-‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Properties‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ) Contour Objects‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 902( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر.‬ ‫6-‬ ‫- 411 -‬
  • 113. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 902‬ ‫7- ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺤﺬف اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ‪.erase old contours‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ رأﺳﻲ أﺳﺎﺳﻲ 5 ﻣﺘﺮ و ﻓﺎﺻﻞ رأﺳﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻮي 1 ﻣﺘﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 012(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 012‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Creating a New Contour Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ ،Contour Style Manager‬ﺳﺘﻌﺪل ﻣﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و‬ ‫آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻟﺨﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﺮدﻳﺔ أو ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫- 511 -‬
  • 114. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Contour Style Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Contour Style‬‬ ‫‪) Manager‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 112(.‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Manage Styles‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Contour Styles in Drawing‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ SMOOTH‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Add‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 112(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 112‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة، ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ أي ﻣﺸﺮوع ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬أو ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ.‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Contour Appearance‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ‪ Current Style‬هﻮ ‪) SMOOTH‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 212(.‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Contour Display‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contours and Grips‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Smoothing Options‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Add‬‬ ‫‪ Vertices‬و اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ إﻟﻰ 8 )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 212(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 212‬ ‫- 611 -‬
  • 115. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Text Style‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2MM‬و اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺪﻗﺔ إﻟﻰ 0 )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫312(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 312‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻠﻮن ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Color‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Color‬و ﻣﻨﻪ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻠﻮن اﻷزرق اﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬ ‫6-‬ ‫‪ Cyan‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Style Manager‬أو أدﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ 4 ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺠﺎورة‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻨﺪوق اﻟﻠﻮن( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 312(.‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Suffix‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) m‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 312(.‬ ‫7-‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Label Position‬و ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Orientation‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ On Contour‬و أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫8-‬ ‫‪) Break Contour For Label‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 412(.‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Readability‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Label Positive Slope‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Border Around Label‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Rectangular‬‬ ‫9-‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 412( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 412‬ ‫اﻵن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫- 711 -‬
  • 116. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Applying a New Contour Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SMOOTH‬ﻋﻠﻰ آﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫1- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layer Icon‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺠﻌﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ CONT-MJR‬هﻲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ Current Layer‬و ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ‪ Freeze‬اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ 0.‬ ‫2- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫3- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contour Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Contour‬‬ ‫‪) Style Manager‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 512(.‬ ‫4- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Manage Styles‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Contour Styles in Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) SMOOTH‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫512( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 512‬ ‫اﻵن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ‪) SMOOTH‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 612(.‬ ‫- 811 -‬
  • 117. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 612‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )إدراج اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ( ‪Labeling Contours‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ )آﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ( ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Contour Style‬‬ ‫‪.Manager‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contour Labels‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Group Interior‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪) Contour Labels – Increment‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 712(.‬ ‫3- أدﺧﻞ 2 أﻣﺎم ‪ Elevation Increment‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪Add multiple interior labels along each‬‬ ‫‪) contour‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 712( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 712‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺧﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 812(.‬ ‫- 911 -‬
  • 118. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 812‬ ‫4- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺮب اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ‪ ،Start Point‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ أﺧﺮى ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ‬ ‫اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ End Point‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 812(.‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ آﻞ 2 ﻣﺘﺮ و ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ و آﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ m‬ﺑﻌﺪ آﻞ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب آﻼﺣﻘﺔ‬ ‫و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺗﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ و ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮاﻗﻊ ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ ﺧﻂ واﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 912(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 912‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ وﺿﻊ )ﻣﻜﺎن( اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ.‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ آﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻀﻪ ‪ Grips‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ وﺳﻂ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺛﻢ اﺳﺤﺐ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 022(.‬ ‫- 021 -‬
  • 119. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 022‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺮاد وﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 022(.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻞ اﻟﻨﺺ )اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ( ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻗﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﺬف ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ آﻨﺘﻮر.‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contour Labels‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Delete Labels‬‬ ‫8- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ، ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر أي ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬف ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر.‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ آﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Converting Contour Objects‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺣﻴﺎن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺮوري ﺗﺰوﻳﺪ اﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و اﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻠﻜﻮن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Land Desktop‬و ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ آﺎﺋﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪ Contour Object‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎج ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪ ،Polyline‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Explode‬ﻣﻦ أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪AutoCAD‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ذﻟﻚ.‬ ‫و ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻓﺈن اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﻤﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ إﻟﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر ‪.Contour Object‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ آﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى إﻟﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر.‬ ‫1- ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Explode‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ آﻨﺘﻮر ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫2- أدﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ذات ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر.‬ ‫ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻵن أﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪) lightweight polyline‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 122(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 122‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Esc‬ﺛﻢ أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪.AutoCAD Text Window‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contour Utilities‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Convert Polylines‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫5- أدﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﺤﻮل.‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻂ اﻵن أﺻﺒﺢ ‪) AECC_CONTOUR‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 222(.‬ ‫- 121 -‬
  • 120. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 222‬ ‫6- أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪.AutoCAD Text Window‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ آﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻮن إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺤﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ و ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬ ‫إﻟﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر واﺣﺪ، و ﻟﺤﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ آﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﻢ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط.‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Editing Contours‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﺜﻞ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Trim‬و ‪ Extend‬و ‪ Break‬و ‪ Erase‬و إن آﺎن ﻧﺴﻖ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪ Contour Style‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ )ﻣﺨﻮﻟﺔ( ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ.‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻘﻄﻊ و ﻣﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﺘﺒﻘﻴﻬﺎ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺴﻮرة، اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ 0 آﺤﺪود ﻟﻸرض.‬ ‫1- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت و ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ 0.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫3- أدﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Trim‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺤﺪود )ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻷﺑﻴﺾ اﻟﻠﻮن( آﺤﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫4- اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪة ﺧﺎرج اﻟﺤﺪود ﻟﻘﻄﻌﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 322(.‬ ‫5- أدﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Extend‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺤﺪود )ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻷﺑﻴﺾ اﻟﻠﻮن( آﺤﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺪ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫6- اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻮاﻗﻌﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺤﺪود ﻟﻤﺪهﺎ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 322(.‬ ‫- 221 -‬
  • 121. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 223 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ - 123 -
  • 122. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ‪Lesson 15: Generating Sections‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ‪ Cross Sections‬ﻹﻇﻬﺎر ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻷرض ﺳﻮاء ﻟﺴﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ أو ﻋﺪة‬ ‫أﺳﻄﺢ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣــﻦ ﻗــﺎﺋـﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــــﺘــﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــــﺘـــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-15.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ ‪Defining and Processing Sections From Single Surface‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ آﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت، أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬ ‫‪ EG‬آﺎﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Select Surface‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 422(.‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ EG‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 422(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 422‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Define Sections‬‬ ‫4- أدﺧﻞ ‪ W-E‬ﻟـ ‪ Group Label‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ AA‬ﻟـ ‪.Section Label‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ AA‬آﺄول ﺧﻂ ﻗﻄﺎع.‬ ‫5- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ AA‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪) AA‬اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ(.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ BB‬آﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻗﻄﺎع.‬ ‫6- أدﺧﻞ ‪ BB‬ﻟـ ‪ Section Label‬و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ BB‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫‪ Endpoint Osnap‬أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪) BB‬اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ(.‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ.‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ اﻷرض ﻓﻴﺠﺐ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ أوﻻ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ.‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ هﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت.‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Process Sections‬‬ ‫- 421 -‬
  • 123. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎن ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺎن ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ.‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ ‪Importing Sections From Single Surface‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Import Sections‬‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Datum‬و هﻮ اﺳﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ.‬ ‫3- أدﺧﻞ 2 ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ.‬ ‫4- أﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ AA‬ﻹدراج اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ AA‬ﻋﻨﺪهﺎ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ.‬ ‫5- أﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ BB‬ﻹدراج اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ BB‬ﻋﻨﺪهﺎ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ.‬ ‫6- آﺒﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Zoom in‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺸﺄة ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 522(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 522‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻤﺠﺎور ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎس ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪Scale‬‬ ‫و ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ 522 اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ AA‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ BB‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﺼﻪ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ 05.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت.‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪.Grid for Sections‬‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Grid‬آﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫9- اﺧﺘﺮ آﺘﻠﺔ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ‪ Section datum block text‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع ‪) AA‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ و ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺮاهﺎ ﻟﺼﻐﺮهﺎ اﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎهﻲ(، ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 2 ﻟـ ‪ Elevation increment‬و أدﺧﻞ 5 ﻟـ ‪.Offset increment‬‬ ‫01- اﺧﺘﺮ آﺘﻠﺔ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ‪ Section datum block text‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع ‪ BB‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ 2 ﻟـ ‪ Elevation increment‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ 5 ﻟـ ‪ Offset increment‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻨﻬﻲ اﻷﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 622(.‬ ‫- 521 -‬
  • 124. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 622‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ‪Creating and Processing Sections from Multiple Surfaces‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﻄﺎع ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )‪ Existing Ground (EG‬و ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ‪Finishing Ground‬‬ ‫)‪.(FG‬‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺮؤﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر أو ادﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ ZE‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Multiple Surfaces On/Off‬و ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ "‪) "Multiple surfaces are on‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 722(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 722‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Define Multiple Surfaces‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Multiple Surface Selection‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select from‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪ Ctrl‬ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻓﻲ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ EG‬و ‪) FG‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 822(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 822‬ ‫- 621 -‬
  • 125. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫5- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ‪ EG‬و ‪ FG‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Current‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 822(. ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ CC‬آﺨﻂ ﻗﻄﺎع ﺛﺎﻟﺚ.‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Define Sections‬‬ ‫7- أدﺧﻞ ‪ SE-NW‬ﻟـ ‪ Group Label‬و ادﺧﻞ ‪ CC‬ﻟـ ‪.Section Label‬‬ ‫8- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ CC‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪) CC‬اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ(.‬ ‫9- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ.‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ هﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫01- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Process Sections‬‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺠﻮاب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻹﻟﺤﺎق اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﺑﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪Append to the end‬‬ ‫‪.of the existing section file‬‬ ‫21- ادﺧﻞ ‪ SE-NW‬ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ: ﻳﻘﻮم اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺮض أﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 922(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 922‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ‪Importing Sections From Multiple Surfaces‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Import Sections‬‬ ‫1-‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ Datum‬آﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ.‬ ‫2-‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ 2 ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ.‬ ‫3-‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻗﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ (CC‬ﻹدراج اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ CC‬إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫4-‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ‪.Datum‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺘﺮى اﻟﻘﻄﺎع )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 032(.‬ ‫5-‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 032‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ ‪Viewing Dynamic Sections‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ آﺄداة ﻟﺘﺸﺎهﺪ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ، اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪Dynamic‬‬ ‫‪ Sections‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ و ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ أي ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت اﻟـ ®‪ Windows‬أو اﺳﺘﻴﺮادهﺎ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ أو ﻋﺪة أﺳﻄﺢ، إن ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ اﻵن ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺬا ﻓﺈن اﻷﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻜﻮن ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ ‪ EG‬و ‪)FG‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(.‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ آﺎﻣﻼ أو أدﺧﻞ ‪ ZE‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.View Quick Section‬‬ ‫3- اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ CC‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ و إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ، و ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Section‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫- 721 -‬
  • 126. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Section‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ Section Window‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ View Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Quick‬‬ ‫‪) Section Properties‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 132(.‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Grid Settings‬أدﺧﻞ 2 أﻣﺎم ‪ Vertical factor‬و أدﺧﻞ 01 أﻣﺎم ‪ Minimum Vertical Increment‬و‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ 05 أﻣﺎم ‪) Minimum Horizontal Increment‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 132(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 132‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Surface Color Settings‬و ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻠﻮن اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ‪ EG‬هﻮ اﻷﺧﻀﺮ و اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬هﻮ‬ ‫اﻷزرق و ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻷﻟﻮان ﺑﺤﺪ أﻗﺼﻰ ﻟـ 8 أﺳﻄﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة.‬ ‫7- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ CC‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ‪ Grips‬و ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ.‬ ‫8- اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ CC‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺾ اﻟﺨﻂ ﺛﻢ اﻣﺴﻚ إﺣﺪى هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ و ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫232(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 232‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻜﺲ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 332(.‬ ‫- 821 -‬
  • 127. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 332‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻗﻄﺎع ﺳﺮﻳﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ.‬ ‫9- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Utilities‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Import Quick Section‬‬ ‫01- ادﺧﻞ 1‪ tutorial‬آﺒﺎدﺋﺔ ﻻﺳﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ‪.Layer name prefix for surfaces‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻮرد ﻗﻄﺎع ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﺮدة، و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺒﺎدﺋﺔ 1‪ tutoral‬ﻓﺈن اﺳﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ‪ EG‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮن ‪) tutorial1-EG‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 432(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 432‬ ‫11- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Datum‬آﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ‪.Datum‬‬ ‫21- أدﺧﻞ ‪ CC‬آﻮﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫31- أدﺧﻞ 2 آﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ ‪.Vertical scale factor‬‬ ‫41- أﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺪرج ﻋﻨﺪهﺎ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع.‬ ‫51- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ.‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫61- أﻏﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ رؤﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 532(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 532‬ ‫- 921 -‬
  • 128. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎدس ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺗﺼﻮر اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪Lesson 16: Visualizing Surfaces‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻴﺰات ﺗﺼﻮر اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ Surface Visualization‬ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻘﻤﻢ اﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ‪ Elevation Banding‬و ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ‪ ،Watershed‬و اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪ Object Viewer‬ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣــﻦ ﻗـﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــﺘـــﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧـــــﺘـــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-16.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ‪Creating Elevation Banding‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﺑﺄوﺟﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪.3D Faces‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Select Surface‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select surface to Open‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Area1C‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 632(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 632‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Surface Display‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Banding - 3D Faces‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Surface Elevation Shading Settings‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 732(.‬ ‫4- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Create Skirts‬و أدﺧﻞ 2 أﻣﺎم ‪ Vertical factor‬و أدﺧﻞ 6 أﻣﺎم ‪Number of‬‬ ‫‪) ranges‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 732( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Auto-Range‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Terrain Range Limits‬‬ ‫- 031 -‬
  • 129. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 732‬ ‫5- اﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 832(. ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Surface Range‬‬ ‫‪.Definitions‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 832‬ ‫6- أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Surface Elevation Shading Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻣﺮة‬ ‫أﺧﺮى.‬ ‫7- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺤﺬف اﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪ Erase old range view‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة‬ ‫‪.Range Statistics‬‬ ‫8- ﺑﻌﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت إﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 932( اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 131 -‬
  • 130. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 932‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ رﺳﻢ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﺑﺄوﺟﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪) 3D Faces‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 042(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 042‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪Viewing Surfaces in the Object Viewer‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪.Object Viewer‬‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Utilities‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Object Viewer‬‬ ‫2- ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Window Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ آﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 142(.‬ ‫- 231 -‬
  • 131. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫إن إﻃﺎر اﻷﺳﻼك ‪ Wire frame‬هﻮ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﻌﺮض اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪ ،Object Viewer‬و ﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت أﻳﻀﺎ ﺳﺖ ﻧﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪة ‪ Orthogonal‬و أرﺑﻌﺔ أﺧﺮى ﻣﺘﺴﺎوﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ‪ Isometric‬ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ، اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪AutoCAD Editor‬‬ ‫هﻮ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪.Object Viewer‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 142‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أدوات اﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪Using Object Viewer Navigation Tools‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم أدوات اﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ و اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ Zoom in and out‬و اﻟﺘﺠﻮال ‪ Pan‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎهﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻮازﻳﺔ ‪ Parallel views‬و اﻟﻘﺮب و اﻟﺒﻌﺪ ‪ Move in and out‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮرة ‪ ،Perspective views‬اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت هﻮ اﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻤﺘﻮازﻳﺔ ‪.Parallel views‬‬ ‫1- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Zoom‬ﺛﺎﻟﺚ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮك ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻣﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ و اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 242(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 242‬ ‫2- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Pan‬راﺑﻊ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻣﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻮل ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 342(.‬ ‫- 331 -‬
  • 132. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 342‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Perspective‬ﺛﺎﻧﻲ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻣﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﺘﺘﺤﺮك ﻗﺮﺑﺎ و ﺑﻌﺪا )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 442(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 442‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎت أﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ﻟﺘﺤﺪد ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﻤﺘﻮازي ‪.Parallel View‬‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Orbit‬ﺛﺎﻧﻲ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻣﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺣﻮل اﻟﺜﻼث ﻣﺤﺎور ‪ X‬و ‪ Y‬و ‪) Z‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 542(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 542‬ ‫5- ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Object Viewer‬‬ ‫6- إن آﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ اﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎع اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺘﻪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪.Undo‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺬف ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ﻣﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت ‪.Range View‬‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Layers‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Range Layers‬‬ ‫8- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺠﻮاب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Erase‬ﻟﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ﻣﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت ‪.Erase range view layers‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ‪Delineating Watershed Areas‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ إﻟﻰ أﻣﺎآﻦ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺒﻨﺎء ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻟﻤﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ و اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﺣﺪود ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫2- اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ AREA1C‬و ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﻪ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ TIN data‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Watershed‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Calculate Watershed‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 642( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Watershed Parameters‬‬ ‫- 431 -‬
  • 133. By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials 246 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ‬Minimum Depression Area ‫ و 05 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ أﻣﺎم‬Minimum Depression Depth ‫3- ادﺧﻞ 1 ﻣﺘﺮ أﻣﺎم‬ .(247 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Must exceed both minimum area and minimum depth ‫ﻣﻦ إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم‬ 247 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Done ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Calculate Watershed ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .(248 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬calculating watershed 248 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(249 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Terrain Model Explorer ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة‬ - 135 -
  • 134. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 942‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﺣﺪود ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫5- اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Watershed‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Import Watershed Boundaries‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Watershed Display Settings‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 052(.‬ ‫6- اﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮاري ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 052(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 052‬ ‫7- أﻏﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬و ﺷﺎهﺪ ﺣﺪود ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 152(.‬ ‫- 631 -‬
  • 135. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 152‬ ‫8- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺘﺮى أرﻗﺎم ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ إدراﺟﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 252(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 252‬ ‫- 731 -‬
  • 136. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ: ﺣﺴﺎب آﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪Lesson 17: Calculating Site Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Site‬و اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Stratum‬ﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ‪ Volume Calculation‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Grid‬و ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ‪ Composite‬ﺛﻢ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ‪ Sections‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﺎرن ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺮق اﻟﺜﻼث.‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس:‬ ‫1- ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر 6002 ‪ C:Land Projects‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر.‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ TUTORIAL‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧـﺘـــﺮ -‪Lesson‬‬ ‫‪ 17.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫4- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ و اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪Defining a Stratum and a Site‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ ‪ EG‬و ‪ FG‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ و اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Select Current Stratum‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Define Stratum‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫352(.‬ ‫2- ادﺧﻞ 1‪ Stratum‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Name‬و ادﺧﻞ ‪ EG and FG Surfaces‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 352(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 352‬ ‫3- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Select‬ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ اﻷول 1 ‪ Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Surface‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ EG‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Define Stratum‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 452(.‬ ‫- 831 -‬
  • 137. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 452‬ ‫4- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Select‬ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ 2 ‪ Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Surface‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Define Stratum‬‬ ‫5- ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻷول 1 ‪ Surface‬هﻮ ‪ eg‬و أن اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ 2 ‪ Surface‬هﻮ ‪) fg‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 552( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 552‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت.‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Site Definition‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Site Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪.Volume Site Settings‬‬ ‫7- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Volume Labeling‬أدﺧﻞ 3‪ m‬أﻣﺎم اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ‪) Suffix‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 652( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫- 931 -‬
  • 138. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 652‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Site Definition‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Define Site‬‬ ‫9- أدﺧﻞ 02 درﺟﺔ ‪ Degree‬ﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺪوران.‬ ‫01- أدﺧﻞ ‪ dot P) .P‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (P‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم أداة ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ 1 ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ أﺻﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪Site‬‬ ‫‪.Base Point‬‬ ‫إن أدوات اﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أواﻣﺮ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ.‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪ dot P).P‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (P‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪد رﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ.‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪ dot G).G‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (G‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر ﺟﺮاﻓﻴﻚ.‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪ dot N).N‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (N‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪد إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل و اﻟﺸﺮق.‬ ‫11- ادﺧﻞ 2 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻟﻤﻘﺎس اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) M‬اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ M‬ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ 2 آﻤﻘﺎس ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) N‬اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ N‬ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت(.‬ ‫21- ادﺧﻞ ‪ dot P).P‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (P‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ أداة ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟـ ‪Endpoint OSNAP‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 752(.‬ ‫- 041 -‬
  • 139. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 752‬ ‫31- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺠﻮاب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ No‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ زاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺪوران أو ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪change the size or‬‬ ‫‪ ،rotation of the grid‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ No‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺣﺪود اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪ erase the old site outline‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.Enter‬‬ ‫41- أدﺧﻞ 1‪ Site‬ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ و اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ أﺻﺒﺢ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ و ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت.‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪Calculating Grid Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ، إن هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﻮم ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮآﻴﺐ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ آﻼ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ، ﺛﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺮاج‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮاج اﻟﻔﺎرق ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ آﻞ ﺧﻄﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Grid Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Calculate Total Site Volume‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Librarian‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪) Site‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 852( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Grid Volume‬‬ ‫‪.Settings‬‬ ‫- 141 -‬
  • 140. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 852‬ ‫3- أﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 952( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Volume‬‬ ‫‪.Results Surface‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 952‬ ‫4- أدﺧﻞ 1‪ G1-Site‬أﻣﺎم ‪ New Surface‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 062(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 062‬ ‫ﻟﻮ آﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﻮاﻗﻊ و ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ﻋﺪة ﻓﻤﻦ اﻷﻓﻀﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﺳﻢ ﻷﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ذات ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ و ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﻴﺪ اﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻷﺳﻄﺢ.‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Command Line‬آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ 6733 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و 08302‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺮدم و 40071 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 162(.‬ ‫- 241 -‬
  • 141. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 162‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻇﻬﺎر ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ.‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 2 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫6- اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ -‪Fg-srf‬‬ ‫‪) bdr‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 262( ﻟﻌﺮض ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻹﻏﻼق ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 262‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Surface‬و ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Volume Surface‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 362( ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ 1‪ G1-Site‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 362‬ ‫8- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Surface Display‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Quick View‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 462(.‬ ‫- 341 -‬
  • 142. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 462‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬و اﻣﺘﺪاد ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺗﻢ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت.‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﺧﺎرج ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎهﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت، و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻔﺎدي ذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻄﺤﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺪود‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ أو ﺑﻠﺼﻖ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ‪ FG‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ،EG‬و آﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ M‬و ‪ N‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪد اﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﺎرج اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ‪Calculating Composite Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ 1 ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Composite Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Calculate Total Site Volume‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫3- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪) Site‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 562( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Composite‬‬ ‫‪.Volume Settings‬‬ ‫- 441 -‬
  • 143. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 562‬ ‫4- أﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 662( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Volume‬‬ ‫‪.Results Surface‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 662‬ ‫5- أدﺧﻞ 1‪ C1-Site‬أﻣﺎم ‪) New surface‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 762( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 762‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ‪ Composite‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 862( ‪Command Line‬‬ ‫آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ 5743 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و 04902 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺮدم و 56471 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 862‬ ‫- 541 -‬
  • 144. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟـ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬و ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت 1‪.C1-Site‬‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫7- ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ Volume‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ C1-Site‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Surface Display‬‬ ‫و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Quick View‬‬ ‫8- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎ ﻟﺘﺮى اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 962(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 962‬ ‫9- ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼق ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬و ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Redraw‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻤﺤﻮ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ.‬ ‫ﻣﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪث ﻗﻄﻊ آﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎت و ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت، ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ذات دﻗﺔ‬ ‫أﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻃﺮﻗﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻔﻲ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺻﺎﻓﻲ آﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم آﺎن 56471 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ آﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ 40071 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ.‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ‪Calculating Section Method Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت، ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺎب ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎورة و ﺗﻀﺮب ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ.‬ ‫أوﻻ، ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ‪ Average End Area Sections‬ﻟﻜﻼ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Section Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sample Sections‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫2- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪) Site‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 072( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Section‬‬ ‫‪.Volume Settings‬‬ ‫- 641 -‬
  • 145. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 072‬ ‫3- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Volume Calculation Type‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Average end area‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Direction‬اﺧﺘﺮ )‪M (x‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 172(.‬ ‫4- ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Volume Corrections‬اﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼت ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 172( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻟﻜﻼ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 172‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ و ﻋﺮض ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 272(.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 272‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ.‬ ‫5- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Section Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Calculate Volume Total‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫6- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ 1‪ ) Site‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 372( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Section‬‬ ‫‪.Volume Settings‬‬ ‫- 741 -‬
  • 146. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 372‬ ‫7- اﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Section Volume Settings‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 472( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 472‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 572( ‪ Command Line‬آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ 8743 ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و 21012 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺮدم و 43571 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ.‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 572‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ‪Viewing the Volume Report‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼث ﻃﺮق اﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ.‬ ‫1- ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Volume Reports‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Site Reports‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪) Site Volume Corrections‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 672(.‬ ‫2- اﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 672( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Site Volumes‬‬ ‫- 841 -‬
  • 147. ‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬ ‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 672‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﺜﻼث ﻃﺮق ﺗﻌﻄﻲ آﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﺘﻘﺎرﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼف ﻣﻘﺪارﻩ %3 ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ أآﺒﺮ آﻤﻴﺔ ) ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪(Section Average End Area‬‬ ‫43571 ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ و ﻗﻴﻤﺔ أﻗﻞ آﻤﻴﺔ )ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ 17004 (Grid‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ.‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﻄﺮق اﻟﺜﻼث ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ، و إن آﺎﻧﺖ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ‪ Composite‬هﻲ أدق اﻟﻄﺮق و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻋﺘﻤﺎد‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ اﻟﺜﻼث ﺣﻴﺚ أن اﻟﻔﺮوق ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺪى اﻟـ %5 و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﻔﺮق ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ.‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎت اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ 772( اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ 772‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎب آﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ أرض ‪Calculating Parcel Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺣﻴﺎن ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ، و ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻟﺠﻐﺮاﻓﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜþ